Ericsson T28 _R1A

352
T28 AT Command Online Reference Revision R1A T28 AT Command  ® Page 1 Online Reference

Transcript of Ericsson T28 _R1A

Page 1: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 1/351

T28

AT CommandOnline Reference

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 1

Online Reference

Page 2: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 2/351

Contents

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 2

Online Reference

1 Introduction ........................................................................ 5

1.1 About this manual ............................................................... 51.2 Using this manual ............................................................... 6

1.3 Using the Ericsson Mobile Office Suite Telephone ............. 7Data functions ..................................................................... 7Facsimile functions ............................................................. 7Mobile Phone Manager ....................................................... 7

1.4 Communications programs ................................................. 8Configuring third party communication programs ............... 8

Configure for V.25ter ...................................................... 8

Locate a Mobile Phone Modem driver ............................ 8Configure the data communications program manually . 8Configureyourfacsimilecommunicationsprogrammanually9

2 Result and Error Codes ................................................... 10

2.1 Result codes ..................................................................... 10Final result codes from AT commands ............................. 10Result codes from call connections .................................. 12

Format of the result codes ................................................ 122.2 Error codes ....................................................................... 13

Report mobile phone failure (+CMEE) .............................. 13Report operational/access failure (+CMS) ........................ 14Service Report (+CR) ........................................................ 16

Cellular Result Codes (+CRC) .......................................... 16

3 AT Commands ................................................................. 17

3.1 Introduction to AT commands ........................................... 173.2 Infrared Modem operating modes ..................................... 173.3 Changing the Infrared Modem operating mode ................ 18

Operating in off-line command mode ................................ 19Switching to on-line data mode ......................................... 19Switching back to off-line command mode ....................... 19Using AT commands during a data connection ................ 20Switching from on-line command mode to on-line data mode

20Switchingfromon-linecommandmodetooff-linecommandmode

Page 3: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 3/351

Contents

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 3

Online Reference

203.4 Operating the AT commands ............................................ 21

Entering a set command ................................................... 21

Entering an execute command ......................................... 22Using read command to view the command settings ....... 23Using test command to request command help ................ 23

3.5 AT command list ............................................................... 24General AT commands ..................................................... 24

4 AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated ................. 37

4.1 Ensemble S1/B/E : GSM DTE-DCE Interface commands 37

4.2 Ensemble C2/C/E : Control and Identification ................... 384.3 Ensemble S2/E : GSM Call Control .................................. 43Unsolicited Result Codes .................................................. 47

4.4 Ensemble C3/E : Call Control ........................................... 48Unsolicited Result Codes .................................................. 51

4.5 Ensemble C4/E : Interface Commands ............................. 524.6 Ensemble S6/C/E : GSM Network Services ..................... 58

Unsolicited Result Codes .................................................. 91

4.7 Ensemble S8/C/E : GSM Facility Lock .............................. 974.8 Ensemble C9/C/E : Multi Mode Phones .......................... 1024.9 Ensemble S9/C/E : GSM Mobile Equipment,Control

and Status 105Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 139

4.10 Ensemble S11/C/E : GSM SMS and CBS PDU Mode .... 144Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 164

4.11 Ensemble S14/E : GSM Digital Binary Ping Pong Mode 169

4.12 Ensemble S16/C/E : GSM Phonebook Commands ........ 1704.13 Ensemble S18/E : GSM Clock, Date and Alarm

Handling 1844.14 Ensemble S19/E : GSM Subscriber Identification ........... 1864.15 Ensemble C20/C/E : Audio Control ................................. 187

Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 195

4.16 Ensemble S20/C/E : Ericsson Specific AT Commands for GSM196

Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 2184.17 Ensemble C21/C/E : Accessory Menus .......................... 220

Page 4: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 4/351

Contents

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 4

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 2284.18 Ensemble C22/C/E : Accessory Authentication .............. 2314.19 Ensemble C24/C/E : Voice Call Control .......................... 233

4.20 Ensemble C25/E : ETSI 07.10 Multiplex Protocol ........... 2344.21 Ensemble C26/C/E : Accessory Identification ................. 2354.22 Ensemble C30/C/E : VAD Support for Vehicle HF 3V .... 238

Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 2434.23 Ensemble C31/C/E : Quick Menu ................................... 247

5 AT Commands Modem Terminated ............................. 249

5.1 Ensemble S1/B/E : GSM DTE-DCE Interface commands 249

5.2 Ensemble C2/B : Identification and Control .................... 2505.3 Ensemble S2/B : GSM Call Control ................................ 256Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 258

5.4 Ensemble C3/B : Call Control ......................................... 2595.5 Ensemble S3/B : GSM Data/Fax .................................... 2645.6 Ensemble C4/B : Interface Commands ........................... 2675.7 Ensemble S4/B : GSM Extended Error Reporting .......... 2845.8 Ensemble C6/B : Data Compression .............................. 285

Unsolicited Result Codes ................................................ 2885.9 Ensemble S10/B : GSM Mobile Equipment

Error Control 2895.10 Ensemble C18/B : Fax Class 1 ....................................... 2905.11 Ensemble C19/B : Fax Class 2 ....................................... 297

6 Glossary ......................................................................... 337

7 Index ............................................................................... 346

Page 5: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 5/351

Introduction

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 5

Online Reference

1 Introduction

This Manual describes the operation of the AT commands supported by theT28 Telephone. The information here is not relevant for day-to-day operationof theTelephone, which is described in the User Manual supplied with theEricsson Mobile Office Suite.

The On-line Reference Manual is for advanced users who require detailedinformation in order to:

develop new communications software;• add the T28 to an application’s list of compatible modems;

• adjust the settings of their mobile telephone and modem.

1.1 About this manual

This manual is designed to supplement the Ericsson T28 Telephone UserManual.

All rights reserved.

 © Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 1998.

 ® Ericsson T28 and Ericsson Infrared Modem and Ericsson Mobile Office areRegistered trademarks of Ericsson Mobile Communications AB.

 ® Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

All other registered trademarks used in this document are alsoacknowledged.

Page 6: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 6/351

Introduction

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 6

Online Reference

1.2 Using this manual

The standard text in this manual is modified to distinguish between the textdisplayed on the screen, typed instructions and examples of command dialog.The distinctions are as follows:

1) Typed commands and option values are written in bold text.

For example: S2=<esc> Options: <esc> 0 - 127

2) Any key strokes are written in bold text in brackets.

For example: <CR>

3) Examples of command dialogue, including keyboard entries andon-screen responses, are written in Courier text.

For example:

AT+CBC=?

+CBC:(0,1),(0-100)

OK

4) The default setting used by a command is indicated by bold text.

For example: Default = 0

Page 7: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 7/351

Introduction

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 7

Online Reference

1.3 Using the Ericsson Mobile Office Suite Telephone

The telephone connects to your computer via an Infrared Modem by meansof a digital infrared link.

Data functions

Transmission speed conforms to the ITU-T standard V.22bis which facilitatesdata transfer at 2,400, 4,800 and 9,600 bits/s. By implementing datacompression the transmission speed can be increased to a theoreticalmaximum data throughput of 38,400 bits/s. between computers.

Facsimile functions

Facsimile operation, at 2,400, 4,800, 7,200 and 9,600 bits/s. conforms toService Class 1 and the proposed Service Class 2 standards.

Short Message ServiceThe telephone supports the short message service (SMS) with messages upto 160 characters long, according to ETSI (GSM) 07.05 using the GSMcharacter set.

Mobile Phone Manager

The Infrared Modem supports commands for access of the mobile phonebook and short message service according to ETSI (GSM) 07.05 and 07.07.

Page 8: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 8/351

Introduction

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 8

Online Reference

1.4 Communications programs

Please refer to the User Manual for instructions on the installation and use ofthe Ericsson Infrared Modem software drivers.

Configuring third party communication programs

If you want to use a communication program which does not include theEricsson Infrared Modem in the list of supported hardware, the followingoptions are suggested:

Configure for V.25ter

The Infrared Modem supports the V.25ter command set. If yourcommunication program can generate and support a V.25ter command,the Infrared Modem does not require the installation of a specific driver.

Locate a Mobile Phone Modem driver

A Mobile Phone Modem driver for your communication program may be

available on either the Ericsson Infrared Mobile Phone Modem utilities

disk or from one of the on-line services.

Configure the data communications program manually

To configure your data communications program manually:

1. Select a generic Mobile Phone Modem driver from the list ofavailable Mobile Phone Modem drivers.

2. Set the Init string to ATZ^M.

3. Set the optional setup string to Asynchronous RLP:

AT+CBST=0,0,1

Page 9: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 9/351

Introduction

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 9

Online Reference

Configure your facsimile communications program manually

To manually configure your facsimile communications program, select aFax Class 1 driver. The Infrared Modem supports Fax Class 2 facsimilewhich might be used if there are problems with the fax service or speedof the computer, or your fax application does not support Fax Class 1.

Page 10: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 10/351

Result and Error Codes

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 10

Online Reference

2 Result and Error Codes

2.1 Result codes

When you send a command from your PC to the Infrared Modem, theresponse is terminated by a result code which is shown on the computerscreen. You use this code to confirm correct operation or to identify anyproblem with the command.

There are two types of result codes:

• final result codes related to the operation of AT commands;• result codes associated with call connections.

Final result codes from AT commands

The Infrared Modem always terminates each response to an AT commandwith a final result code:

Note 

Some AT commands are not relevant to the Infrared Modem operations or can only be set to one parameter value. For completeness and to allow the parameter to be read, some of these commands are supported but not implemented. Calling a command of this type will produce the OK result code 

but will not cause any change to the Infrared Modem. These commands are included in the command descriptions in Chapters 4, 5 and 6.

OK The command(s) and any specified parameters were valid and thecommand has completed execution.

Page 11: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 11/351

Result and Error Codes

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 11

Online Reference

When an error is reported, the ERROR message is preceeded by a copy ofthe text response from the last valid AT command. This is shown in thefollowing example:

ERROR An error has occurred during the command processing.

This could arise because:

• there is a fault in the command syntax;

• one or more parameters are outside the permittedrange;

• the command you issued is not implemented on theInfrared Modem;

• the command is not appropriate to the service;

• class the Infrared Modem is operating.

Valid command AT+CBC=?

Response +CBC:(0,2),(0-100)

OK

Invalid command AT+CBC=?;+FCLASS=3

Response +CBC:(0,2),(0-100)

ERROR

Page 12: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 12/351

Result and Error Codes

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 12

Online Reference

Result codes from call connections

During on-line operation of the telephone, result codes inform you about theprogress of call connections:

Format of the result codes

The result codes described above are in verbose format. You can commandthe Infrared Modem to display result codes in verbose or numeric format or

you can switch them off completely.

To switch between verbose and numeric format, please refer to the use of theAT V command on page 57 and page 57.

To switch the display of result codes on or off, please refer to the use of theAT Q command on page 56.

CONNECT <speed> A connection has been established and the data

rate <speed> is shown.

BUSY The number you called is engaged.

NO DIALTONE Unable to establish the initial connection.

NO CARRIER Either a connection could not be established oran existing connection has been lost.

RING There is an incoming call. This is not aconsequence of local activity and is referred to asan unsolicited result code.

Page 13: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 13/351

Result and Error Codes

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 13

Online Reference

2.2 Error codes

The +CME ERROR result codes indicate an error relating to the functionality ofthe Infrared Modem or Mobile Phone and replaces the final result code ERROR

when first enabled with the AT+CMEE command.

Report mobile phone failure (+CMEE)

+CME ERROR: 0 Phone failure.

+CME ERROR: 1 No connection to phone.

+CME ERROR: 2 Phone modem link reserved.

+CME ERROR: 3 Operation not permitted.

+CME ERROR: 4 Operation not supported.

+CME ERROR: 5 PH-SIM card PIN required.

+CME ERROR: 10 SIM card not inserted.

+CME ERROR: 11 SIM card PIN required.

+CME ERROR: 12 SIM card PUK required.

+CME ERROR: 13 SIM card failure.

+CME ERROR: 14 SIM card busy.

+CME ERROR: 15 SIM card wrong.

+CME ERROR: 16 Incorrect password.

+CME ERROR: 20 Memory full.

+CME ERROR: 21 Invalid index.

+CME ERROR: 22 Not found.

+CME ERROR: 23 Memory failure.

Page 14: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 14/351

Result and Error Codes

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 14

Online Reference

Report operational/access failure (+CMS)

The +CMS ERROR result codes indicate an error relating to the InfraredModem, Mobile Phone or Network relating to the Short Message Service(SMS) and replaces the final result code ERROR.

+CME ERROR: 24 Text string too long.

+CME ERROR: 25 Invalid character in text string.

+CME ERROR: 26 Dial string too long.

+CME ERROR: 27 Invalid character in dial string.

+CME ERROR: 100 Unknown.

+CMS ERROR: 0 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values.

to

+CMS ERROR: 127

+CMS ERROR: 128 GSM 03.40 Section 9.2.3.22 values.

to

+CMS ERROR: 255

+CMS ERROR: 300 Mobile phone failure.

+CMS ERROR: 301 Short message service of mobile phonereserved.

+CMS ERROR: 302 Operation not allowed.

+CMS ERROR: 303 Operation not supported.

+CMS ERROR: 304 Invalid PDU mode parameter.

Page 15: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 15/351

Result and Error Codes

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 15

Online Reference

+CMS ERROR: 305 Invalid text mode parameter.

+CMS ERROR: 310 SIM card not inserted.

+CMS ERROR: 311 SIM card PIN necessary.

+CMS ERROR: 312 SIM card PIN necessary for PH-SIM.

+CMS ERROR: 313 SIM card failure.

+CMS ERROR: 314 SIM card busy.

+CMS ERROR: 315 SIM card wrong.

+CMS ERROR: 316 SIM PUK required

+CMS ERROR: 317 SIM PIN2 required

+CMS ERROR: 318 SIM PUK2 required

+CMS ERROR: 320 Memory failure.

+CMS ERROR: 321 Invalid memory index.

+CMS ERROR: 322 Memory full.

+CMS ERROR: 330 SMSC address unknown.

+CMS ERROR: 331 No network service.

+CMS ERROR: 332 Network timeout.

+CMS ERROR: 340 no +CNMA acknowledgement expected

+CMS ERROR: 500 Unknown error.

+CMS ERROR: ...511 range 256...511 reserved

+CMS ERROR: 512... manufacturer specific

Page 16: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 16/351

Result and Error Codes

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 16

Online Reference

Service Report (+CR)

When a data connection is being established, the +CR messages are sent tothe PC before the final result code CONNECT. Use the AT+CR command toenable these messages.

Cellular Result Codes (+CRC)

The +CRC messages replace the unsolicited result code RING and providemore information about the type of the incoming call. Use the AT+CRCcommand to enable these messages.

+CR: ASYNC Asynchronous transparent.

+CR: SYNC Synchronous transparent.

+CR: REL ASYNC Asynchronous non-transparent.

+CR: REL SYNC Synchronous non-transparent.

+CRING: ASYNC Asynchronous transparent.

+CRING: SYNC Synchronous transparent.

+CRING: REL ASYNC Asynchronous non-transparent.

+CRING: REL SYNC Synchronous non-transparent.

+CRING: FAX Facsimile.

+CRING: VOICE Normal voice.

Page 17: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 17/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 17

Online Reference

3 AT Commands

3.1 Introduction to AT commands

This chapter describes how AT commands are used to exchange informationwith your mobile telephone and Infrared Modem. The AT commands are listedat the end of this chapter. For a description of each command, refer toChapters 4, and 5.

You use AT commands to:

• configure your mobile telephone and Infrared Modem;• request information about the current configuration or operational

status of your mobile phone/modem;• test availability and request the range of valid parameters, when

applicable, for an AT command.

3.2 Infrared Modem operating modes

The Infrared Modem can be set in any one of three modes of operation. Theseare:

off-line command mode the Infrared Modem is placed in off-line command

mode when first powered up and is ready for entryof AT commands.

on-line data mode allows “normal” operation of the Infrared Modem,

exchanging data or facsimile with the remotemodem.

on-line command mode you can switch to on-line command mode whenyou want to send AT commands to the InfraredModem while still remaining connected to theremote modem.

Page 18: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 18/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 18

Online Reference

3.3 Changing the Infrared Modem operating mode

The following illustration summarises the methods that are used to switchbetween the three Infrared Modem operating modes:

Power up

Off-line Command Mode

On-line Command Mode

On-line Data Mode

Exchange AT command data between 

computer and Infrared Modem 

Exchange data or facsimile 

with a remote modem 

Exchange AT command data with the 

Infrared Modem while staying on-line 

Losecarrierorlose I.R.linkorpress“NO”buttonorpull DTRlow *

Lose carrier

orlose I.R. linkorpress “No”buttonorpull DTR loworATH +++AT <?>

or

pull DTR low #

Answer

ATA

ATO

Dial

ATD<tel.no.>

# &D previously set to 1.* &D previously set to 2.

Page 19: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 19/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 19

Online Reference

Operating in off-line command mode

In off-line command mode, the Infrared Modem accepts data as commandsand not as normal communications traffic. You enter commands by typing atthe PC keyboard.

Switching to on-line data mode

To enter on-line data mode, so that you can exchange data with the modemat the other end of the link, you enter the ATD command followed by thetelephone number to make the call. Alternatively, typing ATA to answer anincoming call will also place the Infrared Modem in on-line mode.

Switching back to off-line command mode

Any of the following will return the Infrared Modem to off-line command modefrom on-line data mode:

• loss of the connection (NO CARRIER error);

• loss of the I.R. link between the Infrared Modem and your computer;• pressing the “NO” button on your mobile phone;• pulling DTR low provided &D has previously been set to 2.

 Note: The &D command is described on page 274. The setting of &D

determines the action taken when DTR is pulled low while you are

in on-line data mode

&D set to 1 - Infrared Modem switches to on-line command mode

&D set to 2 - Infrared Modem switches to off-line command mode.

Page 20: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 20/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 20

Online Reference

Using AT commands during a data connection

If you wish to use AT commands while connected to a remote modem in on-line data mode and maintain connection with the remote modem, you mustfirst enter on-line command mode.

There are two ways you can switch from on-line data mode to on-linecommand mode:

• Type the escape sequence “+++” followed by an appropriate ATcommand. This command must be selected from the options AT,ATE, ATH, ATI, ATL, ATM, ATQ, ATV and ATX. Using this method

you can perform an AT function as you move in to on-line commandmode. For example, if you switch using:

+++ATH<CR>

the Infrared Modem is switched to on-line command mode and the AT

command is executed, causing the connection to be terminated (hang-up). If you type the escape sequence “+++” without any followingcommand, the system waits one second, switches to on-line command

mode and responds OK;

• Pull DTR low after previously setting &D to 1.

Switching from on-line command mode to on-line data mode

To return to on-line data mode while in on-line command mode, type:

ATO<CR>

Switching from on-line command mode to off-line commandmode

To return the Infrared Modem to off-line command mode from on-linecommand mode:

• use any of the methods described in “Switching back to off-linecommand mode” above;

• type +++ATH <CR> to switch to on-line command mode and hang up

at once.

Page 21: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 21/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 21

Online Reference

3.4 Operating the AT commands

In command mode, there are four types of command you can issue:

• a set command to adjust the Infrared Modem’s operating parameters;

• an execute command which directs action without the need of anyparameters;

• a read command to view the current command settings;

• a test command to view the available command parameters.

Not all AT commands support all four functions. The descriptions in Chapters4 to 6 list the functions available for each AT command.

Entering a set command

The standard format for entering a set command is:

 Note: All command lines are completed by pressing the  < CR> key on the computer keyboard. For the remainder of this manual,appropriate use of the < CR> key is assumed.

AT<command>=<parameters> <CR>

Where: AT Notifies the Infrared Modem that acommand is being entered.

<command> The name of the command being entered.

<parameters> The values to be used by the command.

<CR> All command lines are terminated by

pressing the <CR> (Return or Enter) key.

Page 22: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 22/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 22

Online Reference

To set the Infrared Modem to operate with autobaud over an asynchronousconnection the command line would be:

AT+CBST=0,0,1

However, the commands also have default settings. These are values whichare assumed to have been entered when no actual value is placed in thecommand line.

For example, the above command can be entered as:

AT+CBST=,,1

The default values used by the commands are indicated in the followingdescriptions by bold text.

When the parameter is a character string (for example “<name>”) then thevalue should be entered between quotes. For example “Peter”.

Optional parameters are shown in square brackets. For example [<value>].

Entering an execute command

Execute commands are very similar to set commands. They usually do not

require any parameters and are used to obtain information about the mobilephone or Infrared Modem or to execute an event.

For example, to find out information about the mobile phone battery, enter the+CBC command:

AT+CBC

The Infrared Modem responds:

+CBC: 0,60

indicating that the mobile phone battery is connected (0) and that it has 60%charge remaining.

Page 23: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 23/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 23

Online Reference

To answer an incoming call, you execute the A command:

ATA

Using read command to view the command settings

To check the current settings of a command, use the ‘?’ option.

For example, to check the current settings of the +CBST command, enter:

AT+CBST?

If CBST has been set according to the previous example, the settings aredisplayed as:

+CBST: 0,0,1

Using test command to request command help

To test the availability of a command and the range of parameters, use the ‘=?’

option with the command.

For example, to check the parameters available to the command line in theexample above, enter:

AT+CBST=?

The line:

+CBST: (0,4,6,7,68,70,71),(0),(1)

is displayed indicating the range of valid entries that can be set for the

parameters <data rate>, <bearer service> and <connection element>.

Page 24: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 24/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 24

Online Reference

3.5 AT command list

General AT commandsEnsemble S1/B/E : GSM DTE-DCE Interface commands

+CSCS Select terminal character set .......................................... 37

Ensemble C2/C/E : Control and Identification

AT Attention Command........................................................ 38

Z Reset to user defined configuration................................ 38

&F Set to factory configuration ............................................. 39+CGMI Request mobile phone manufacturer identification ........ 40

+CGMM Request mobile phone model identification.................... 40

+CGMR Request mobile phone revision identification ................. 41

+CGSN Request ME product serial no identification ................... 42

* List all supported commands .......................................... 42

Ensemble S2/E : GSM Call Control

+CMOD Set call mode.................................................................. 43

+CHUP Call hang-up ................................................................... 44

+CRC Cellular result codes ....................................................... 45

+VTS DTMF and tone generation............................................. 46

Unsolicited Result Codes

+CRING Call mode indication ....................................................... 47

Ensemble C3/E : Call Control

A Answer............................................................................ 48

H Hook control ................................................................... 48

D Dial ................................................................................. 49

+CFUN Set mobile phone functionality........................................ 50

L Monitor speaker loudness control................................... 51

Unsolicited Result Codes

Page 25: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 25/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 25

Online Reference

RING Incoming Call Indication ................................................. 51

Ensemble C4/E : Interface Commands

S3 Command line termination character.............................. 52

S4 Response formatting character ...................................... 53

S5 Command line editing character ..................................... 54

E Command echo .............................................................. 55

Q Result code suppression ................................................ 56

V Result code format ........................................................ 57

Ensemble S6/C/E : GSM Network Services+CAOC Advice of charge............................................................. 58

+CNUM Subscriber number ......................................................... 59

+CREG Set network registration .................................................. 60

+COPS Set operator selection..................................................... 62

+CLIP Calling line identification presentation ............................ 64

+CLIR Calling line identification restriction ................................ 65

+CCFC Call forwarding................................................................ 67

+CCWA Call waiting ..................................................................... 69

+CHLD Call related supplementary services............................... 71

+CSSN Supplementary service notifications ............................... 73

+CACM Accumulated Call Meter ................................................. 75

+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum ................................. 76

*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status ........................................ 77*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile ................................. 78

*ELIN Ericsson line set ............................................................. 79

*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network........................... 80

*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network ........................... 82

*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name ................................................. 83

*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number .................................. 84

+CPUC Price Per Unit And Currency Table ................................ 86

Page 26: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 26/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 26

Online Reference

*ESVM Ericsson Set Voice Mail Number .................................... 87

*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function................................................. 89

*EDIS Ericsson Divert Set ......................................................... 90Unsolicited Result Codes

+CREG Network Registration ...................................................... 91

+CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation .......................... 91

+CCWA Call Waiting .................................................................... 92

+CSSU Supplementary service notification ................................. 93

+CSSI Supplementary service notification................................. 94

*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function................................................. 95

Ensemble S8/C/E : GSM Facility Lock

+CLCK Facility lock ..................................................................... 97

+CPWD Set/change new password ........................................... 100

Ensemble C9/C/E : Multi Mode Phones

+WS46 Mode selection ............................................................. 102

Ensemble S9/C/E : GSM Mobile Equipment,Control

and Status

+CKPD Keypad control.............................................................. 105

+CIND Indicator control ............................................................ 106

+CPAS Mobile phone activity status ......................................... 108

+CPIN Send Password ............................................................ 110

+CBC Mobile phone battery charge ........................................ 112

+CSQ Mobile phone signal quality .......................................... 114

+CMER Mobile equipment event reporting ................................ 115

+CVIB Vibrator Mode ............................................................... 117

*ECAM Ericsson call monitoring................................................ 118

*EDME Ericsson enable data menus ........................................ 119

*ELAN Ericsson Language....................................................... 120*EMAR Ericsson master reset ................................................... 122

Page 27: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 27/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 27

Online Reference

*ERIL Ericsson ring level set................................................... 123

*ERIN Ericsson ring set ........................................................... 125

*ERIP Ericsson ring signal playback command ...................... 126*ESIL Ericsson silence command ........................................... 127

*ESKL Ericsson settings key lock mode .................................. 128

*ESKS Ericsson settings key sound ......................................... 129

*ESMA Ericsson set message alert sound................................ 130

*ESMM Ericsson settings minute minder................................... 131

*ESAM Ericsson settings answer mode.................................... 132

*ESBL Ericsson settings back light mode ................................ 133

*ESDF Ericsson settings date format ....................................... 134

*ESOM Ericsson settings own melody ...................................... 135

*ESTF Ericsson settings time format ....................................... 137

*ETXT Ericsson text command ................................................ 138

Unsolicited Result Codes

+CKEV Keypad event................................................................ 139+CIEV Indicator event reporting ............................................... 140

*ECAV Ericsson Call Monitoring event ..................................... 141

Ensemble S11/C/E : GSM SMS and CBS PDU Mode

+CSMS Select SMS message service ....................................... 144

+CPMS Preferred SMS message storage ................................. 146

+CMGL List messages............................................................... 148

+CMGR Read message ............................................................. 150

+CMGS Send SMS messages ................................................... 152

+CMSS Send from storage ........................................................ 153

+CMGW Write message to memory............................................ 154

+CMGD Delete message............................................................ 155

+CMGF Message format ............................................................ 156

+CSCA SMS service centre address......................................... 157

Page 28: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 28/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 28

Online Reference

+CSCB Select cell broadcast message type ............................. 159

+CSAS Save Settings ............................................................... 160

+CRES Restore Settings ........................................................... 161+CNMI New message indication to TE ..................................... 162

Unsolicited Result Codes

+CBM New Message Indication .............................................. 164

+CMTI New Message Indication .............................................. 165

+CMT Received Message ....................................................... 166

+CMS Report operational/access failure (+CMS).................... 167

Ensemble S14/E : GSM Digital Binary Ping Pong Mode

*BINARY Start binary mode ......................................................... 169

Ensemble S16/C/E : GSM Phonebook Commands

+CPBS Select mobile phone phonebook memory storage ....... 170

+CPBR Read mobile phone phonebook entries........................ 171

+CPBF Phonebook Find ........................................................... 173

+CPBW Write mobile phone phonebook entries ........................ 175

*ECAR Ericsson Callers Allowed Read .................................... 177

*ECAW Ericsson Callers Allowed Write..................................... 178

*EPRR Ericsson Personal Ringtype Read................................ 179

*EPRW Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write ................................ 181

*ECAS Ericsson Callers Allowed Set........................................ 183

Ensemble S18/E : GSM Clock, Date and Alarm

Handling

+CCLK Clock............................................................................. 184

+CALA Alarm ............................................................................ 185

Ensemble S19/E : GSM Subscriber Identification

+CIMI Read International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) ... 186

Ensemble C20/C/E : Audio Control

Page 29: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 29/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 29

Online Reference

*EALR Audio Line Request ...................................................... 187

*EARS Analog Ring Signal Request......................................... 188

*EMIR Mute Indication Request ............................................... 189*EAMS Audio Mode Selection................................................... 190

*EPHD Portable Hands Free Detection .................................... 193

*ECBP CHF Button Pushed...................................................... 194

Unsolicited Result Codes

*EALV Audio Line Response ................................................... 195

*EMIV Music Mute Indication Response.................................. 195

Ensemble S20/C/E : Ericsson Specific AT Commands for GSM

*ECUR Ericsson current report ................................................. 196

*EENL Ericsson Environment List ............................................ 197

*EKSP Ericsson Key Sound Playback...................................... 199

*EKSR Ericsson Key Sound Change Report............................ 200

*EMIC Ericsson microphone mode .......................................... 202

*EPEC Ericsson Profile Environment Change.......................... 203

*EPEE Ericsson pin event ........................................................ 204

*EPED Ericsson Profile's List Of Environments Delete ............ 205

*EPEW Ericsson Profile's List Of Environments Write .............. 207

*EAPS Ericsson Active Profile Set ........................................... 209

*EAPN Ericsson Active Profile Rename ................................... 211

*ESNU Ericsson settings number ............................................. 212

*EBCA Ericsson Battery And Charging Algorithm .................... 213

*EQVL Ericsson External Volume Status ................................. 216

*EXVC Ericsson Set External Volume Control ......................... 217

Unsolicited Result Codes

*EBCA Ericsson Indication Algorithm Status ............................ 218

*EPEV Ericsson Pin Code event .............................................. 218

*EVOLC Ericsson Volume Change Report ................................. 218

Page 30: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 30/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 30

Online Reference

*EKSC Ericsson Key Sound Change Report............................ 219

Ensemble C21/C/E : Accessory Menus

*EAM Ericsson Add Accessory Menu Item ............................. 220

*EAST Ericsson Accessory Status Text ................................... 221

*EASM Ericsson Accessory Sub Menu..................................... 222

*EAID Ericsson Accessory Input Dialog .................................. 224

Unsolicited Result Codes

*EAAI Ericsson Accessory Additional Indication ..................... 228

*EAMI Ericsson Accessory Menu Indication............................ 228*EAII Ericsson Accessory Input Dialog Indication.................. 229

Ensemble C22/C/E : Accessory Authentication

+CSCC Secure Control Command ............................................ 231

Ensemble C24/C/E : Voice Call Control

*EVA Answer Incoming Call Command ................................. 233

*EVD Voice Dial Command .................................................... 233*EVH Voice Hook Command.................................................. 233

Ensemble C25/E : ETSI 07.10 Multiplex Protocol

+CMUX Activate Multiplex Protocol ........................................... 234

Ensemble C26/C/E : Accessory Identification

*EACS Ericsson Acccessory Status ......................................... 235

Ensemble C30/C/E : VAD Support for Vehicle HF 3V

*EYRR Recording Result .......................................................... 238

*EYRE Recognised Entry ......................................................... 240

*EYDO Done ............................................................................. 241

*EYRV Registered VAD ............................................................ 241

*EYPI Phone Info .................................................................... 242

Unsolicited Result Codes

Page 31: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 31/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 31

Online Reference

*EYPE Play Entry ..................................................................... 243

*EYPP Play Prompt .................................................................. 243

*EYRE Recognise..................................................................... 243*EYTN Train Name................................................................... 244

*EYPT Play Training Recording ............................................... 244

*EYDE Delete Entry .................................................................. 244

*EYSR Save Recording ............................................................ 245

*EYAB Abort ............................................................................. 245

*EYGP Get Phones................................................................... 245

*EYDP Delete Phone ................................................................ 246

*EYRP Register Phone............................................................. 246

*EYSS Start Synchronise ......................................................... 246

Ensemble C31/C/E : Quick Menu

*ECMW Ericsson Customized Menu Write ................................ 247

*EMLR Ericsson Menu List Read.............................................. 248

Ensemble S1/B/E : GSM DTE-DCE Interface commands

+CSCS Select terminal character set ........................................ 249

Ensemble C2/B : Identification and Control

AT Attention Command...................................................... 250

Z Reset to user defined configuration.............................. 250

&F Set to factory configuration ........................................... 251

I Identification information............................................... 252

+GMI Request Infrared Modem manufacturer identification... 253

+GMM Request Infrared Modem model identification .............. 253

+GMR Request Infrared Modem revision identification ........... 254

+GCAP Request Infrared Modem capabilities list...................... 255

Ensemble S2/B : GSM Call Control

+CR Service reporting control............................................... 256

Page 32: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 32/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 32

Online Reference

+CRC Cellular result codes ..................................................... 257

Unsolicited Result Codes

*CRING Cellular result code....................................................... 258

Ensemble C3/B : Call Control

A Answer.......................................................................... 259

H Hook control ................................................................. 259

D Dial ............................................................................... 260

O Return to on-line data mode ......................................... 262

P Select pulse dialling...................................................... 262T Select tone dialling ....................................................... 262

Ensemble S3/B : GSM Data/Fax

+CRLP Radio link protocol ........................................................ 264

+CBST Select bearer service type ............................................ 265

Ensemble C4/B : Interface Commands

S2 Escape sequence character ......................................... 267S3 Command line termination character............................ 268

S4 Response formatting character .................................... 269

S5 Command line editing character................................... 270

E Command echo ............................................................ 271

Q Result code suppression .............................................. 272

V Result code format ...................................................... 273

&C Circuit 109 (DCD) control ............................................. 274

&D Circuit 108 (DTR) response .......................................... 274

+IFC DTE-DCE local flow control .......................................... 275

S0 Automatic answer control ............................................. 277

S6 Blind dial delay control.................................................. 278

S7 Connection completion timeout .................................... 279

S8 Comma dial modifier delay control ............................... 280S10 Automatic disconnect delay control .............................. 281

Page 33: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 33/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 33

Online Reference

M Monitor speaker control ................................................ 282

X Call progress monitoring control................................... 283

Ensemble S4/B : GSM Extended Error Reporting

+CEER Extended error report ................................................... 284

Ensemble C6/B : Data Compression

+DS Data compression......................................................... 285

+DR Data compression reporting ......................................... 287

Unsolicited Result Codes

+DR Data Compression Indication ....................................... 288

Ensemble S10/B : GSM Mobile Equipment

Error Control

+CMEE Report mobile equipment error..................................... 289

Ensemble C18/B : Fax Class 1

+FCLASS Capabilities Identification and Control .......................... 290

+FMI Manufacturer identification ........................................... 291

+FMM Request product identification ...................................... 291

+FMR Request version............................................................ 292

+FTS Stop transmission and wait........................................... 292

+FRS Receive silence ............................................................ 293

+FTM Facsimile transmit......................................................... 294

+FRM Facsimile receive .......................................................... 295

+FTH Transmit HDLC............................................................. 296

+FRH Receive HDLC.............................................................. 296

Ensemble C19/B : Fax Class 2

+FCLASS Capabilities Identification and Control .......................... 297

+FAA Fax auto answer setting ............................................... 298

+FAXERR Request hang-up cause code....................................... 299

+FBADLIN Number of consecutive bad lines to accept.................. 302

Page 34: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 34/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 34

Online Reference

+FBADMUL Bad line multiplier parameter........................................ 303

+FBOR Facsimile page transfer bit order parameter................. 304

+FBUF Buffer size report .......................................................... 305+FBUG Session Message Report ............................................. 306

+FCQ Copy quality checking................................................... 307

+FCR Capability to receive parameter .................................... 308

+FCIG Local polling ID parameter............................................ 309

+FCTCRTY Continue to correct count during ECM ......................... 310

+FDFFC Data format failure check.............................................. 311

+FDCC TAE Capability parameters........................................... 312

+FDCS Session results ............................................................. 315

+FDIS Current session negotiation parameters....................... 316

+FDR Fax data receive command .......................................... 318

+FDT Fax data transmission command.................................. 320

+FECM Error correction mode................................................... 322

+FET Page punctuation.......................................................... 323

+FK Orderly fax abort ........................................................... 324

+FLID Local polling ID parameter............................................ 324

+FLNFC Page length format conversion parameter ................... 325

+FLPL Document for polling parameter ................................... 326

+FMDL Request product identification ...................................... 327

+FMFR Request manufacturer’s identification .......................... 327

+FMINSP Minimum facsimile page transfer speed parameter...... 328

+FPHCTO Facsimile page transfer timeout parameter .................. 329

+FPTS Page transfer status parameter .................................... 330

+FREV Request DCE revision .................................................. 331

+FRBC Receive data block size................................................ 331

+FREL Facsimile page transfer EOL alignment parameter ...... 332

+FSPL Enable polling parameter.............................................. 333

+FTBC Fax page transfer data transmit byte count parameter. 334

Page 35: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 35/351

AT Commands

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 35

Online Reference

+FVRFC Vertical resolution conversion parameter ..................... 335

+FWDFC Page width conversion parameter ................................ 336

Page 36: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 36/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 37

Online Reference

4 AT Commands Phone Terminal

Terminated4.1 Ensemble S1/B/E : GSM DTE-DCE Interface commands

+CSCS Select terminal character set 

Description: Defines the character set to be used.

Set command: +CSCS=[<chset>]

Options: <chset> “GSM” Default GSM alphabet.

Example: AT+CSCS="GSM"

OK

Read command: +CSCS? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CSCS?

+CSCS: "GSM"

OK

Test command: +CSCS=?

Example: AT+CSCS=?

+CSCS: "GSM","IRA","88591","ERICSSON"

OK

Page 37: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 37/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 38

Online Reference

4.2 Ensemble C2/C/E : Control and Identification

AT Attention Command  

Description: Determines the presence of an MS.

Z Reset to user defined configuration 

Description: Perform a ‘soft reset’, i.e. terminate any ongoingoperation and connection and restore one of theconfigurations stored in nonvolatile memory as theactive profile.

Execute command: AT

Example: AT

OK

Set command: Z

Example 1: ATZ

OK

Test command: Z=?

Example: ATZ=?

OK

Page 38: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 38/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 39

Online Reference

&F Set to factory configuration 

Description: Resets the settings to the predefined factory

configurations. Configurations which would adverselyeffect an open connection or a current data transmissionare not loaded until the connection ceases.

Command: &F=[<pr>] or &F[<pr>]

Options: <pr> 0 Reset all the settings to thefactory defaults.

Example: AT&F

OK

Test command: &F=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT&F=?

&F: (0)

OK

Page 39: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 39/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 40

Online Reference

+CGMI Request mobile phone manufacturer identification 

Description: Returns the manufacturer identification for the mobile

phone.

+CGMM Request mobile phone model identification 

Description: Returns the model identification of the mobile phone.

Execute command: +CGMI

Example: AT+CGMI

ERICSSON

OK

Test command: +CGMI=?

Example: AT+CGMI=?

OK

Execute command: +CGMMResponse: <model type> <model

name>

<model type> 10 char ASCII string.

Padded with space ifneeded.

<model name> Model name for transceiver

unit.Example: AT+CGMM

1050501S

1018

OK

Test command: +CGMM=?

Example: AT+CGMM=?

OK

Page 40: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 40/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 41

Online Reference

+CGMR Request mobile phone revision identification 

Description: Returns the revision identification of the mobile phone.

Execute command: +CGMR

Response: <revision> String date inYYMMDDHHMM format.

Example: AT+CGMR

9710051610 Type numbering structure

OK

Test command: +CGMR=?

Example: AT+CGMR=?

OK

Page 41: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 41/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 42

Online Reference

+CGSN Request ME product serial no identification 

Description: Returns a string containing the IMEI number of the MS.

* List all supported commands  

Description: Lists one or more lines of AT commands supported bythe MS.

Execute command: +CGSN

Returns: <imei> A string containing the IMEInumber of the MS.

Example: AT+CGSN

10110100101

OK

Test command: +CGSN=?

Example: AT+CGSN=?

OK

Execute command: *

Example: AT*

AT+CGMI

AT+CGMM

AT+CGMR

AT+CGSN

OK

Page 42: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 42/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 43

Online Reference

4.3 Ensemble S2/E : GSM Call Control

+CMOD Set call mode 

Description: Sets the call mode for further dialling commands or thenext answering command.

Set command: +CMOD=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Single mode.

1 Alternating voice/fax.

Example: AT+CMOD=1 Change to voice/fax mode.

OK

Read command: +CMOD? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CMOD?

+CMOD: 1

OK

Test command: +CMOD=? Always returns (0-1).

Example: AT+CMOD=?

+CMOD: (0-1)

OK

Page 43: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 43/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 44

Online Reference

+CHUP Call hang-up 

Description: Terminates the current call. Command is used to

provide an assured means of terminating an alternatingmode call.

Execute command: +CHUP

Example: AT+CHUP

OK

Test command: +CHUP=?

Example: AT+CHUP=?

OK

Page 44: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 44/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 45

Online Reference

+CRC Cellular result codes 

Description: Determines whether or not the extended format of report

for an incoming call should be used.

Set command: +CRC=[<mode>]

Options: <mode> 0 Disable extended result

codes.

1 Enable extended resultcodes.

Default = 0.Example: AT+CRC=0

OK

Read command: +CRC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CRC?

+CRC: 0

OK

Test command: +CRC=? Always returns (0-1).

Example: AT+CRC=?

+CRC: (0-1)

OK

Unsolicited Result

code: +CRING:<type>

Page 45: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 45/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 46

Online Reference

+VTS DTMF and tone generation 

Description: Allows the transmission of DTMF tones and arbitrary

tones.

Execute command: +VTS=<DTMF>

Options: <DTMF> Single ASCII character in

the set 0-9, #, *, A-D.

Example: AT+VTS="1" Transmit DTMF tone.

OK

Test command: +VTS=?

Example: AT+VTS=?

OK

Page 46: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 46/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 47

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

+CRING Call mode indication 

Description: Set command controls whether or not the extendedformat of incoming call indication is used.

Unsolicited Resultcode: *CRING:<type> When enabled,indicates

the incoming call to the TEinstead of the normal

RING.Defined values: <type> ASYNC Asynchronous transparent.

FAX Facsimile (TS 62).

VOICE Normal voice (TS 11).

ALT FAX/

VOICEAlternating voice/fax, voicefirst (TS 61).

ALT

VOICE/FAX/

Alternating voice/fax, faxfirst (TS 61).

Page 47: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 47/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 48

Online Reference

4.4 Ensemble C3/E : Call Control

A Answer  

Description: Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call.

H Hook control  

Description: Terminates a connection.

Execute command: A

Example: ATA

OK

Execute command: H

Example: ATH

OK

Page 48: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 48/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 49

Online Reference

D Dial  

Description: Initiate a phone voice connection (phone number

terminated by semicolon). The phone number used toestablish the connection will consist of digits andmodifiers or a stored number specification.

Execute command: D<n> Dial the phone numberspecified in the command as<n>.

Modifiers: ; Informs the Infrared Modem

that the number is a voicerather than a fax or data

number.

Dial examples: ATD046193000; Voice dial, immediatelyreturns OK.

Responses: ERROR An unexpected erroroccurred while trying to

establish the connection.

NO DIALTONE The line is busy.

NO CARRIER The mobile phone is notregistered.

Page 49: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 49/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 50

Online Reference

+CFUN Set mobile phone functionality 

Description: Sets the power status of the mobile phone to either on or

off.

Note that when the keylock is activated on the phone, you cannot turn it off bymeans of the +CFUN command.

Set command: +CFUN=[<fun>]

Options: <fun> 0 Switch off the mobile

phone.

1 Switch on the mobilephone.

Default = 0.Example: AT+CFUN=0

OK

Read command: +CFUN? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CFUN?

+CFUN: 1

OK

Test command: +CFUN=?

Example: AT+CFUN=?

+CFUN: (0-1)

OK

Page 50: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 50/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 51

Online Reference

L Monitor speaker loudness control 

Description: Set the volume of the speaker.

Unsolicited Result Codes

RING Incoming Call Indication 

Description: Indicates that the MS is being asked to accept a call.

Set command: L[=][<vol>]

Options: <vol> 0-8 0 is off, 8 is loudest.

Default = 2.

Examples: ATL=4

OK

Read command: L?Example: ATL?

L: 0

OK

Test command: L=? Always returns (0-8).

Example: ATL=?

L: (0-8)

OK

Unsolicited Resultcode: RING Produced when an

accessory is connected tothe MS (i.e. DTMS is

asserted).

Page 51: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 51/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 52

Online Reference

4.5 Ensemble C4/E : Interface Commands

S3 Command line termination character 

Description: Defines the character to be used as the line terminationcharacter. This is used both for the detection of an endof command and in formatting of responses. Theresponse to the command is modified to reflect thechange.

Set command: S3=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0..127 The ASCII value of theCommand Line termination

character.

Default = 13.

Example: ATS3=13

OK

Read command: S3? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS3?

013

OK

Test command: S3=?

Example: ATS3=?

S3: (0-127)

OK

Page 52: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 52/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 53

Online Reference

S4 Response formatting character 

Description: Defines the character to be used as the line formatting

character. The response to the command is modified toreflect the change.

Set command: S4=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0..127 The ASCII value offormatting character.

Default = 10.

Example: ATS4=10

OK

Read command: S4? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS4?

010

OK

Test command: S4=?

Example: ATS4=?

S4: (0-127)

OK

Page 53: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 53/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 54

Online Reference

S5 Command line editing character 

Description: Defines the character to use as command line editing

character.

Set command: S5=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0..127 The default ASCII value of

the Line Editing Character.

Default = 8.

Example: ATS5=8

OK

Read command: S5? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS5?

008

OK

Test command: S5=?

Example: ATS5=?

S5: (0-127)

OK

Page 54: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 54/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 55

Online Reference

E Command echo  

Description: Enables or disables the command line echo.

Set command: E=[<value>] or E[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 No echo of command modecharacters.

1 Echo command modecharacters.

Default = 1.

Example: ATE=1

OK

Read command: E? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATE?

E: 1

OK

Test command: E=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: ATE=?

E: (0,1)

OK

Page 55: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 55/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 56

Online Reference

Q Result code suppression  

Description: Enables or disables the display of result codes. When

the result code is disabled, the Infrared Modem does notissue any final result codes but continues to providenormal text in response to commands.

Set command: Q=[<value>] or Q[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Enable result codes.

1 Disable result codes.

Default = 0.Example: ATQ=1

OK

Read command: Q? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATQ?

Q: 1

OK

Test command: Q=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: ATQ=?

Q: (0,1)

OK

Page 56: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 56/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 57

Online Reference

V Result code format  

Description: Select either verbose or numeric response codes.

Set command: V=[<value>] or V[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Display numeric resultcodes.

1 Display verbose resultcodes.

Default = 1.

Example: ATV=1

OK

Read command: V? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATV?

V: 1

OK

Test command: V=? Always returns (0-1).

Example: ATV=?

V: (0-1)

OK

Page 57: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 57/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 58

Online Reference

4.6 Ensemble S6/C/E : GSM Network Services

+CAOC Advice of charge 

Description: Returns the current call meter value in hexadecimalformat. Must be supported on SIM-card.

Execute command: +CAOC[= < mode >]

Options: <mode> 0 Query CCM Value.

1 Deactivated the unsolicited

reporting of CCM value.

2 Activated the unsolicitedreporting of CCM value.

Default = previous value.

Returns: <ccm> Three byte Hex value ofcurrent call meter value.

Example: +CAOC=[<mode>]

+CAOC:<ccm>

OK

Read Command: +CAOC?

+CAOC:<mode>

OK

Test command: +CAOC=?

Example: AT+CAOC=?

OK

Unsolicited Result

code: +CCCM: <ccm>

Page 58: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 58/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 59

Online Reference

+CNUM Subscriber number 

Description: Command returns MSISDN information relating to the

subscriber.

Execute command: +CNUM

Returns: +CNUM: [<alphax>],<numberx>,<typex>

[,speed>,<service>[,<itc>]]

<alphax> Optional alphanumericstring associated with

<numberx>.

<numberx> String type phone number offormat specified by <typex>.

<typex> Type of octet address in

integer format.

<speed> 8 No speed specificationneeded.

<service> 0 Asychronous modem.

4 Voice.

5 Fax.

<itc> 0 3.1 kHz.

1 UDI.

Example: AT+CNUM

+CNUM: "VOICE","0706410741",128,8,4

OK

Test command: +CNUM=?

Example: AT+CNUM=?

OK

Page 59: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 59/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 60

Online Reference

+CREG Set network registration 

Description: Allows network registration of an unsolicited result code.

Set command: +CREG=[< n >]

Options: <n> 0 Disable network registrationof unsolicited result code.

1 Enable network registrationof unsolicited result code.That is, it sends an

unsolicited result code forevery change in the status.

Example: AT+CREG=1 Activate.

OK

Read Command: +CREG? Returns the current setting.

Returns: +CREG:<n>,<stat>

<n> 0 Disable network registrationcode.

1 Enable network registrationcode.

<stat> 0 Not registered.

1 Registered, home network.

2 Not registered, currentlysearching for a new operator

to register to.

3 Registration denied.

4 Unknown.

5 Registered, roaming

Page 60: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 60/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 61

Online Reference

Example: AT+CREG?

+CREG: 0,1

OK

Test Command: +CREG=? Always returns (0-1).

Example: AT+CREG=?

+CREG: (0-1)

OK

Unsolicited Result

code: +CREG: < stat > [,<lac>,<ci>]

Page 61: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 61/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 62

Online Reference

+COPS Set operator selection 

Description: Allows the automatic or manual selection of the GSM

network operator.

Set command: +COPS=[< mode >[,< format >[,< oper >]]]

Options: <mode> 0 Automatic (<oper> field is

ignored).

1 Manual (<oper> field ispresent).

4 Manual/automatic (<oper>field is present).

<format> 0 Long alphanumeric format16 characters.

1 Short alphanumeric format.8 characters.

2 Numeric. GSM LocationArea Identification numberwhich consists of a threeBCD digit country code and

a two BCD digit networkcode.

<oper> String type as specified by<format>.

Example: AT+COPS=0

OK

Page 62: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 62/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 63

Online Reference

Read command: +COPS?

Example: AT+COPS? Returns the current setting.

+COPS: 0,0,"RADIOLINJA"

OK

Test command: +COPS=?

Returns: +COPS: (<status>,<long>,<short>,<numeric>)

<status> 0 Unknown.

1 Available.

2 Current.

3 Forbidden.

<long> Long alphanumeric format.

<short> Short alphanumeric format.

<numeric> GSM Location Area

Identification number which

consists of a three BCD digitcountry code and a two BCDdigit network code.

Example: AT+COPS=?

+COPS: (2,"RADIOLINJA","RL", "24405")

+COPS: (0,"TELE","TELE","24491")

OK Two operator networks have

been found, the status ofTELE is unknown and

RADIOLINJA is currentlyselected.

Page 63: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 63/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 64

Online Reference

+CLIP Calling line identification presentation 

Description: Calling line identification presentation allows the

subscriber to get the calling line identity of the callingparty when receiving a mobile terminated call.

Set command: +CLIP= [< n >]

Options: <n> 0 Disable.

1 Enable.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+CLIP=1

OK

Read command: +CLIP? Returns the current setting.

Returns: +CLIP: <n>, <m>

<m> 0 CLIP not provisioned.

1 CLIP provisioned.

2 Unknown, e.g. no network.

Example: AT+CLIP?

+CLIP: 1,1

OK

Test command: +CLIP=? Returns (0-1).

Example: AT+CLIP=?

+CLIP: (0-1)

OK

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CLIP: <number>,<type>

Page 64: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 64/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 65

Online Reference

+CLIR Calling line identification restriction 

Description: Calling line identification restriction allows the calling

subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of thecalling line identity to the called party.

Set command: +CLIR=[<n>]

Options: <n> 0 Presentation according tothe subscription of theCLIR service.

1 CLIR invocation.

2 CLIR suppression.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+CLIR=1

OK

Read command: +CLIR? Returns the current

setting.

Returns: +CLIR: <n>,<m>

<m> CLIR service status in thenetwork.

0 CLIR not provisioned.

1 CLIR provisioned inpermanent mode.

2 Unknown, e.g. no network.3 CLIR temporary mode,

presentation restricted.

4 CLIR temporary mode,presentation allowed.

Page 65: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 65/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 66

Online Reference

Example: AT+CLIR?

+CLIR: 1,1

OK CLIR invoked andpermanently provisioned.

Test command: +CLIR=? Always returns (0-2).

Example: AT+CLIR=?

+CLIR: (0-2)

OK

Page 66: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 66/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 67

Online Reference

+CCFC Call forwarding 

Description: Allows control of the call forwarding supplementary

service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivationand status query are all supported.

Set command: +CCFC=<reason>,<mode>[,<number>[,<type>[,<classx>]]]

Options: <reason> 0 Unconditional.

1 Mobile busy.

2 No reply.3 Not reachable.

4 All call forwarding.

5 All conditional call

forwarding.

<mode> 0 Disable.

1 Enable.

2 Query status.

3 Registration.

4 Erasure.

<number>String String type phone numberof forwarding address informat specified by <type>.

<type> Integer Type of octet address ininteger format (GSM

04.08, [3]). Default 145when international codeincluded, otherwise 128.

Page 67: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 67/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 68

Online Reference

<classx> 1 Voice L1.

2 Data.

4 Fax.

128 Voice L2.

Query (mode=2)

returns:

+CCFC:<status>,<class1>[,<number>,<type>][<

CR><LF>+CCFC: <status>,<class2>[,<number><type>][…]]

Defined values: <status> 0 Active voice.

1 Active.

Example 1: AT+CCFC=1,1,"931123456"

OK Enable CFB.

Example 2: AT+CCFC=1,2

+CCFC: Query CFNRy.

"35821654321",145,,,20

OK Forward after 20 seconds.

Example 3: AT+CCFC=1,3,"931123456"

OK Registration.

Example 4: AT+CCFC=1,4,"931123456"

OK Erasure.

Test command: +CCFC=? Always returns (0-5).Example: AT+CCFC=?

+CCFC: (0-5)

OK

Page 68: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 68/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 69

Online Reference

+CCWA Call waiting 

Description: Allows control of the call waiting supplementary service.

Set command: +CCWA=[<n>[,<mode>[,<classx>]]]

Options: <n> 0 Disable the result coderepresentation.

1 Enable the result coderepresentation.

<mode> 0 Disable.

1 Enable.

2 Query status.

<classx> 1 Voice L1.

2 Data.

4 Fax.

128 Voice L2.

Returns: When <mode>=2 and command is successful.

+CCWA:

<status>,<class1>[<CR><LF>+CCWA:

<status>,<class2>[...]]

Example 1: AT+CCWA=1,1 Enable call waiting.

OK

Example 2: AT+CCWA=1,2

+CCWA: 1,1

+CCWA: 1,2

+CCWA: 1,4

+CCWA: 0,128

OK

Page 69: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 69/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 70

Online Reference

Read command: +CCWA? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CCWA?

+CCWA: 1

OK

Test command: +CCWA=? Always returns (0-1).

Example: AT+CCWA=?

+CCWA: (0-1)

OK

Unsolicited Result

code:

+CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>

Page 70: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 70/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 71

Online Reference

+CHLD Call related supplementary services 

Description: Temporarily disconnects a call, but retains the

connection to the network and to a service that allowsmultiparty conversation.

Execute command: +CHLD=<n>

Options: <n> 0 Releases all held calls orsets User Determined UserBusy (UDUB) for a waitingcall.

1 Releases all active calls (ifany exist) and accepts theother (held or waiting) call.

1X Release a specific activecall X.

2 Places all active calls (if anyexist) on hold and acceptsthe other (held or waiting)call.

2X Places all active calls onhold except call X withwhich communication is

supported.

3 Adds a held call to theconversation.

4 Connects the held andwaiting call and

disconnects the user.

Example 1: AT+CHLD=1

OK Activate call hold andwaiting.

Example 2: AT+CHLD=0

OK Deactivate.

Page 71: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 71/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 72

Online Reference

Note that X is the numbering (starting with 1 but not greater than 6) of the callgiven by the sequence of setting up or receiving calls (active, held or waiting)as seen by the served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are

released and new calls take the lowest possible number.

Where both a held call and a waiting call exists, the procedures will apply tothe waiting call (not the held call) in a conflicting situation.

Note that the “directory number” case will be handled by the dial command D

and the END case with hangup command H or +CHUP.

Test command: +CHLD=? Always returns

(0-4,11-16,21-26).

Example: AT+CHLD=?

+CHLD: (0-4,11-16,21-26)

OK

Page 72: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 72/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 73

Online Reference

+CSSN Supplementary service notifications 

Description: Allows supplementary service related network initiated

notification result codes to be presented.

Set command: +CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]

Options: <n> 0 Disable +CSSI result code

presentation.

1 Enable +CSSI result codepresentation.

<m> 0 Disable +CSSU result codepresentation.

1 Enable +CSSU result codepresentation.

Example: AT+CSSN=1,1

OK Enable.

Read command: +CSSN? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CSSN?

+CSSN: 1,1

OK

Test command: +CSSN=? Always returns (0-1),(0-1).

Example: AT+CSSN=?

+CSSN: (0-1),(0-1)

OK

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CSSU:<code2>[,<index>]

Page 73: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 73/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 74

Online Reference

Intermediate

Result codes: +CSSI:<code1>[,<index>]

<code1> 0 Unconditional callforwarding active.

1 Some conditional callforwardings active.

2 Call has been forwarded.

3 A call is waiting.

4 CUG call. Not supported.

5 Outgoing calls barred.

6 Incoming calls barred.

7 CLIR suppression rejected.

<index> 0...9 CUG index.

10 no index.

Unsolicited Result

code: +CSSI:<code2>

Page 74: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 74/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 75

Online Reference

+CACM Accumulated Call Meter 

Description: Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call

meter value in SIM file EFACM. ACM contains the totalnumber of home units for both the current and precedingcalls.

Set command: +CACM=[<passwd>]

Options: <passwd> String SIM PIN2 password

Example: AT+CACM= Resets the ACM value.

OK

Read command: +CACM? Returns the current value.

Returns: +CACM: <acm>

Defined values: <acm> String Accumulated call meter

value similarly coded as<ccm> under +CAOC.

Example: AT+CACM?

+CACM: 00A41B

OK

Test command: +CACM=?

Example: AT+CACM=?

OK

Page 75: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 75/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 76

Online Reference

+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum 

Description: Set command sets the Advice of Charge related

accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM fileEFACMmax.

Set command: +CAMM=[<acmmax>[,<passwd>]]

Options: <acmmax>

String Accumulated call metermaximum value similarlycoded as <ccm> under+CAOC; value zero

disables ACMmax feature<passwd>String SIM PIN2 password

Example: AT+CAMM=001000

OK

Read command: +CAMM? Returns the current value.

Example: AT+CAMM?

+CAMM: 001000

OK

Test command: +CAMM=?

Example: AT+CAMM=?

OK

Page 76: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 76/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 77

Online Reference

*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status 

Description: Used to request the MS to give status for ALS (Alternate

Line Services). The information is available on the SIMcard. If ALS is active, the user has two lines for voicecalls. The line number or name tag for the line is thenindicated on the display.

Execute command: *EALS

Returns: *EALS: <status>

Defined values <status> 0 ALS function is not active

(off).

1 ALS function is active (on).

Example: AT*EALS

*EALS:0

OK

Test command: *EALS=?

Example: AT*EALS=?

OK

Page 77: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 77/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 78

Online Reference

*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile 

Description: Used to read the Customer Service Profile (CSP) from

the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates theservices that are user accessible.

Execute command: *ECSP=<service group>

Options: <servicegroup>

Byte Each service group has acorresponding number,service group code.

Returns: *ECSP:<service group>,<services>

Defined values: <services> Bit mask (8 bits), indicating

the services within theservice group. Bit=0:unused or unavailableservice. Bit=1: availableservice.

Test command: *ECSP=?

Example: AT*ECSP=?

OK

Page 78: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 78/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 79

Online Reference

*ELIN Ericsson line set 

Description: This requests the ME to set the current line to <line>.

Set command: *ELIN=<line>

Options: <line> 1 L1

2 L2

Example: AT*ELIN=1

OK

Read command: *ELIN?Example: AT*ELIN?

*ELIN: 1

OK

Test command: *ELIN=?

Example: AT*ELIN=?

*ELIN: (1-2)

OK

Page 79: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 79/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 80

Online Reference

*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network 

Description: Used to read the SIM preferred list of network

(EFPLMNsel). It returns entries in location range<index1> - <index2>. If <index2> is omitted only location<index1> is returned. If both <index1> and <index2> isomitted, i.e. only <format> is stated, the whole list ispresented.

Execute command: *EPNR=<format> [,<index1> [,<index2]]

Options: <format> 0 Long format alphanumeric

<oper>. Not supported!1 Short format alphanumeric

<oper>. Not supported!

2 Numeric <oper>.Default=2

<index1> Integer Start index (>0)

<index2> Integer Stop index (>0)

Returns: *EPNR: <index1>,<oper1>[...]*EPNR: <index2>, <oper2>

Defined values: <oper> String String indicates the code forthe operator. E.g. GSM -

Sweden - Europolitan:"24008" (3 + 2). PCS: 3digits for Country and 3digits for Network.

Example: AT*EPNR=2,1

*EPNR: 1,23820 GSM - Sweden -Europolitan:

OK

Test command: *EPNR=?

Example: AT*EPNR=?

*EPNR: (1-2),2

Page 80: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 80/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 81

Online Reference

OK

Page 81: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 81/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 82

Online Reference

*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network 

Description: Used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks

(EFPLMNsel).

Set command: *EPNW=[<index>] [,<format>,<oper>]

Options: <index> Integer Index to entry in SIM

preferred list. The SIMpreferred list contains atleast 8 positions accordingto GSM 11.11.

<format> 0 Long format alphanumeric<oper>. Not supported!

1 Short format alphanumeric<oper>. Not supported!

2 Numeric <oper>.Default=2

<oper> String String indicates the code for

the operator. E.g. GSM -Sweden - Europolitan:"24008" (3 + 2). PCS: 3digits for Country and 3digits for Network.

Example: AT*EPNW=1,,24008

OK

Test command: *EPNW=?Example: AT*EPNW=?

*EPNW: (1-2),2

OK

Page 82: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 82/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 83

Online Reference

*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name 

Description: Sets the nametag for a selected line.

Set command: *ESLN=<line>[,<name>]

Options: <line> 0 The two lines will use thedefault name tags, i.e. "L1"

and "L2".Default=0.

1 Line 1

2 Line 2<name> String Characters for name tag.

This parameter is optionalwhen <line> is set to 0.

Example: AT*ESLN=2,Private

OK

Read command: *ESLN?

Example: AT*ESLN?

*ESLN:1,L1

*ESLN:2,Private

OK

Test command: *ESLN=?

Returns: *ESLN:(list of supported <line>s),<lname>

Defined values: <lname> Integer Max. number of charactersto use in <name> string.Default=20.

Example: AT*ESLN=?

*ESLN: (1-2),20

OK

Page 83: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 83/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 84

Online Reference

*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number 

Description: Used for 1) set up a credit card number in the ME, 2)

disable credit card calls, 3) enable one of the credit cardcall services, 4) query the settings for one of theservices, 5) query the active credit call access server.

Set command: *ESCN=<mode> [,<passwd>][,<indexn>][,<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode>[,<send order>]]

Options: <mode> 0 Settings for a credit card

call. The parameters(<passwd>, <indexn>,

<asn>, <vercode>) aremandatory when <mode> =0

1 Disable credit card calling(<passwd>).

2 Enable one of the credit

card call services(<passwd>, <indexn>).

3 Query (<passwd>,<indexn>).

4 Query for the selectedcredit call access server.

<passwd> String Phone lock code "PS", PH-

SIM.<indexn> 1 Index number to the 1st

Credit Card Call accessserver.

2 Index number to the 2nd

Credit Card Call accessserver.

Page 84: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 84/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 85

Online Reference

<asn> 0..9,+ Max. 20 characters Phone

number of format specifiedby <typex>.

<type> Integer Type of address, (referGSM 04.08 [3] subclause10.5.4.7).

<name> String Character string of thename tag.

<vercode>

0..9,A,B,C

,D,#,*Max. 20 characters.

<send

order>

1 Verification code 1st

Default=1.

2 Phone number to call 1st.

Query (mode=3)returns:

*ESCN:<indexn>,<asn>,<type>,<name>,<ver-code>,<send order>

Query (mode=4)returns:

*ESCN:<selindexn>

Defined values: <selindexn>

0 Credit card calling disabled.Default=0.

1 Index number to the 1stCredit Card Call accessserver.

2 Index number to the 2ndCredit Card Call access

server.

Test command: *ESCN=?

Example: AT*ESCN=?

*ESCN: (1-2),(0-4),(1-2)

OK

Page 85: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 85/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 86

Online Reference

+CPUC Price Per Unit And Currency Table 

Description: Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price

per unit and currency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCTinformation can be used to convert the home units (asused in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currencyunits.

Set command: +CPUC=<currency>,<ppu>[,<passwd>]

Options: <currency>

String Alpha-identifier of thecurrency code (3

characters, e.g. SEK)<ppu> String Price per unit; dot is used

as a decimal separator (e.g."2.66")

<passwd> String SIM PIN2 password.

Example: AT+CPUC= SEK,2.66

OK

Read command: +CPUC?

Example: AT+CPUC?

+CPUC: SEK,2.66

OK

Test command: +CPUC=?

Example: AT+CPUC=?

OK

Page 86: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 86/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 87

Online Reference

*ESVM Ericsson Set Voice Mail Number 

Description: The number to the voice mail server is set with this

command. If ALS is active, L1 and L2 has one voice mailnumber each. The numbers can be different or thesame.

Set command: *ESVM=<line>,<onoff>[,<number>,<type>]

Options: <line> 1 Line 1

2 Line 2

<onoff> 0 Disable the voice mailnumber. Shortcut menu on

the phone MMI is removed.Not Supported.

1 Enable the voice mail

number.

<number>0..9,+ Character string.

<type> Type of address octet (refer GSM04.08 [3] section 10.5.4.7)

129 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan, national / international unknown.

145 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan,international number

161 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan, national

number.

128..255 Other values refer GSM04.08 [3] section 10.5.4.7.

Example: AT*ESVM=1,1,"90823677",129

OK

Read command: *ESVM?

Page 87: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 87/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 88

Online Reference

Example: AT*ESVM?

*ESVM: 1,1,"90823672",129

OK

Test command: *ESVM=?

Example: AT*ESVM=?

*ESVM:(1-2),(0-

1),20

20 - maximum length ofvoice mail number.

OK

Page 88: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 88/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 89

Online Reference

*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function 

Description: Enables and disables notification of divert status

changes with the unsolicited result code *EDIF.

Set command: *EDIF=<onoff>

Options: <onoff> 0 Disable notification with the

unsolicited result code*EDIF

1 Enable notification with the

unsolicited result code

*EDIF

Example: AT*EDIF=1

OK

Read command: *EDIF?

Example: AT*EDIF?

*EDIF: 1

OK

Test command: *EDIF=?

Example: AT*EDIF=?

*EDIF: (0-1)

OK

Page 89: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 89/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 90

Online Reference

*EDIS Ericsson Divert Set 

Description: Enables and disables the divert setting in the currently

active profile. The command is also used to set the divertnumber for the profile. See also the commandAT+CCFC.

Set command: *EDIS=<onoff>[,<number>[,<type>]]

Options: <onoff> 0 Disable unconditional divertfor the profile

1 Enable unconditional divert

for the profile

<number>String String type phone numberof forwarding address informat specified by <type>.

<type> Integer Type of octet address ininteger format (GSM 04.08,[3]). Default 145 wheninternational code included,otherwise 129.

Example: AT*EDIS=1,TBA

OK

Read command: *EDIS?

Example: AT*EDIS?

*EDIS: TBA

OK

Test command: *EDIS=?

Example: AT*EDIS=?

*EDIS: (0-1)

OK

Page 90: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 90/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 91

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

+CREG Network Registration 

Description: Indicates a change in the ME network registration status.

+CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation 

Please refer to AT command +CLIP.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CREG: <stat> Produced when an

accessory is connected tothe MS (i.e. DTMS isasserted).

Defined values: <stat> 0 Not registered, ME is notcurrently searching a new

operator to register to.

1 Registered, home network.

2 Not registered, but ME iscurrently searching a newoperator to register to.

3 Registration denied.

4 Unknown.

5 Registered, roaming.

Page 91: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 91/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 92

Online Reference

+CCWA Call Waiting 

Description: Allows control of the Call Waiting supplementary

service.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>

Defined values: <number> string Phone number of formatspecified by <type>.

<type> integer Address octet in integer

format (see GSM 04.08 [4]

subclause 10.5.4.7)

<class> integer Sum of integers eachrepresenting a class ofinformation.

1 voice L1.

2 Data. Not supported

4 Fax. Not supported

128 Voice L2.

Page 92: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 92/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 93

Online Reference

+CSSU Supplementary service notification 

Description: Refers to supplementary service related network

initiated notifications.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CSSU: <code2>[,<cindex>]

Defined values: <code2> 0 This is a forwarded call (MTcall setup).

1 This is a CUG call (also

<index> present) (MT call

setup) Not supported

2 Call has been put on hold(during a voice call).

3 Call has been retrieved

(during a voice call).

4 Multiparty call entered

(during a voice call).

5 Call on hold has beenreleased (this is not an SS

notification) during a voicecall.

6 Forward check SSmessage received (can bereceived whenever)

16 This is a CUG call (also<cindex> present) (MT callsetup)

<cindex> 0..32767 CUG index

Page 93: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 93/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 94

Online Reference

+CSSI Supplementary service notification 

Description Refers to supplementary service related network

initiated notifications.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CSSI: <code1>[,<cindex>]

Defined values: <code1> 0 This is a forwarded call.

1 CUG call. Not supported.

2 Call has been put on hold.

3 Call has been retrieved.

4 CUG call. Not supported.

5 The call on hold has beenreleased. (Not a SS

Notification).

6 Forward check SS

message. Not supported.

7 CLIR suppression rejected

16 This is a CUG call (also<cindex> present)

<cindex> 0..32767 CUG index

Page 94: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 94/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 95

Online Reference

*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function 

Description This unsolicited result code is sent whenever the call

forwarding information (divert) for the phone is changed.Enable with the AT*EDIF command.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EDIF: <reason>,<status>, <classx> [,<number>,<type>]

Options: <reason> 0 Unconditional.

1 Mobile busy.

2 No reply.3 Not reachable.

<status> 0 Disabled.

1 Enabled, the phone is

diverted for the <reason>above.

<classx> integer Sum of integers each

representing a class ofinformation.

1 Voice L1.

2 Data.

4 Fax.

0..127 Also all other values below128 are reserved by ETSI.

128 Voice L2.

<number>string Phone number of formatspecified by <type>.

Page 95: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 95/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 96

Online Reference

<type> integer Address octet in integer

format (see GSM 04.08 [4]subclause 10.5.4.7).

Default 145 wheninternational code included,otherwise 129.

Page 96: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 96/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 97

Online Reference

4.7 Ensemble S8/C/E : GSM Facility Lock

+CLCK Facility lock 

Description: Locks or unlocks a ME or network facility. Theseoperations require a password.

Set command: +CLCK=<fac>,<mode>[,<passwd>[,<class>]]

Options: <fac> “CS” Lock Control Surface,e.g.phone, keyboard.

“PS” Lock Phone to SIM card.“SC” Lock SIM Card.

“P2” SIM PIN2

“AO” Bar All Outgoing calls.

“OI” Bar Outgoing InternationalCalls.

“AI” Bar All Incoming calls.

“IR” Bar Incoming calls whenRoaming outside the home

country.

“OX” Bar Outgoing internationalcalls eXcept to home

country.

“AB” All Barring services.

“AG” All outgoing barringservices.

“AC” All incoming barringservices.

Page 97: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 97/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 98

Online Reference

<mode> 0 Unlock.

1 Lock.

2 Query status.

10 Full lock (only valid for<fac>="PS", after power onalways ask for password).

<passwd> String type passworddefined in +CPWDcommand.

<class> 1 Voice L1.

2 Data.

4 Fax.

8..127 Reserved.

128 Voice L2.

Example 1: +CLCK="CS",1,"passwd"

OK Lock phone keyboard.

Example 2: +CLCK="PS",1,"passwd"

OK Lock phone to SIM card.

Example 3: +CLCK="CS",2

+CLCK: 1 Lock phone keyboard isactivated.

OK

Test command: +CLCK=? Always returns(“CS”,“PS”,“SC”,“P2”,“AO”,“OI”,“OX”,“AI”,“IR”,“AB”,“AG”,“AC”).

Returns: <status> 0 Not active.

1 Active.

Example: AT+CLCK=?

Page 98: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 98/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 99

Online Reference

+CLCK: ("CS","PS","SC","P2","AO",

"OI","OX","AI","IR","AB","AG","AC")

OK

Page 99: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 99/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 100

Online Reference

+CPWD Set/change new password 

Description: Action command sets a new password for the facility

lock function defined by command Facility Lock +CLCK.

Set command: +CPWD=<fac>,<oldpwd>, <newpwd>

Options: <fac> “PS” lock Phone to SIM card.

“SC” lock SIM Card.

“P2” SIM PIN2.

“AO” bar All Outgoing calls.

“OI” bar Outgoing International

calls.

“AI” bar All Incoming calls.

“IR” bar Incoming calls whenRoaming outside the homecountry.

“OX” bar Outgoing internationalcalls eXcept to homecountry.

“AB” All Barring services.

“AG” All outGoing barringservices.

“AC” All inComing barringservices.

<oldpwd> same as passwordspecified for the facilityfrom the ME user interface.

<newpwd> create a new password,length determined with<pwdlength>.

Page 100: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 100/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 101

Online Reference

Example: AT+CPWD="SC","4321","1234"

OK Lock SIM card and change

password.Test Command: +CPWD=?

Returns: +CPWD: list of supported (<fac>,<pwdlength>)s

<pwdlength> Integer type, maximumlength of the password.

Example: AT+CWPD=?

+CPWD: ("PS",8),("SC",8),("P2",8),

("AO",8),("OI",8),("OX",8),("AI",8),

("IR",8),("AB",8),("AG",8),("AC",8)

OK

Page 101: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 101/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 102

Online Reference

4.8 Ensemble C9/C/E : Multi Mode Phones

+WS46 Mode selection 

Description: Allows an accessory to query and control the cellularprotocol mode of the phone.

Set command: +WS46=[n]

<n> 0 All systems. No wireless stack isactive and the phone is not connected

to a charger.

1 GSTN (telephone), analog. Enables

standard voice / data / fax modembehavior.

2 Mobitex. Used by Ericsson Mobitex

wireless packet data adapters.

4 Cellular Digital Packet Data.

7 AMPS Analog Cellular - Data Mode.

Causes the MS to set a number ofparameters to enable a AMPS analogcellular data call to be made.

12 GSM Digital Cellular. Used for GSM at900 Mhz, DCS-1800, and PCS-1900phones.

13 CDMA Digital Cellular. Used by theWCS phones.

14 TDMA Digital Cellular (DAMPS)

Mode. For IS-135 asynchronous data/ fax and voice services.

15 Concurrent access to multiple wire-less data services. Used to invoke anIP modem interface along with AT+WS45.

Page 102: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 102/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 103

Online Reference

17 AMPS Analog Cellular - Voice Mode.Returned in response to AT+WS46?

during a call at 800 Mhz. Other multi-

mode phone systems (WCS, PCS-1900) support the set command tothis value (not DAMPS phones).

240 Charge Only Mode. Indicates that nowireless stack is active and the phone

is connected to a charger.

241 ACES Satellite Mode. Used by Erics-son ACES Satellite phones.

242 Reserved

243 800 Mhz. AMPS Only Mode. A phonewith AMPS capability is commandedto scan at 800 Mhz. and camp on an800 Mhz. control channel. The phone

requests an AMPS analog voice chan-nel for incoming and outgoing calls.The set command is accepted onlywhen there is no call in progress.

244 Reserved

245 Multi-scan mode. The phone scansmultiple systems for incoming callsaccording to a prioritized list. Outgoingdata calls are attempted according tothe same prioritized list.

Example: AT+WS46=12

OK

Read command +WS46?

Example: AT+WS46?

+WS46: 12 GSM Digital Cellular.

OK

Test command: +WS46=?

Page 103: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 103/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 104

Online Reference

Example: AT+WS46=?

+WS46: (0,12,240)

OK

Page 104: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 104/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 105

Online Reference

4.9 Ensemble S9/C/E : GSM Mobile Equipment,Controland Status

+CKPD Keypad control 

Description: Emulates the ME keypad by giving each character in astring with stroke and pause times *0.1 seconds.

Execute command: +CKPD=<keys>[,<time>[,<pause>]]

<keys> # Hash(number).

* Star(*).0... 9 Number keys.

< Left arrow.

> Right arrow.

C/c Clear display (C/CLR).

D/d Volume down.

E/e Connection end.

S/s Connection start (SEND).

U/u Volume up.

<time> 0..255 0..25.5 seconds.

<pause> 0..255 0..25.5 seconds.

Example: AT+CKPD="C",20

OK Clear main display by

holding clear button downfor two seconds.

Test command: +CKPD=?

Example: AT+CKPD=?

OK

Page 105: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 105/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 106

Online Reference

+CIND Indicator control 

Description: Reads the value of ME indicators.

Set command notsupported

Read Command: +CIND? Read indicator value.

Returns: +CIND:<ind>,<ind>,...

Defined values: <ind> Integer value in the range of<descr>.

Example: AT+CIND?

+CIND: 3,4,0,0,1,0,0,0,0,0,0

OK

Test Command: +CIND=?

Returns: +CIND:(<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)),(<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)),

Defined values

<descr>:

“battchg” Battery charge level (0-4).

Not supported in setcommand.

“signal” Signal quality (0-5). Notsupported in set command.

“batterywarning” Battery warning (0-1).

“chargerconnected” Charger connected (0-1).Not supported in set

command.“service” Service availability (0-1)

(Net contact status, 1 = Netcontact).

“sounder” Sounder activity (0-1)(Phone silent status, 1 =

phone silent).

“message” Message received (0-1).

“call” Call in progress (0-1).

Page 106: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 106/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 107

Online Reference

“roam” roaming indicator (0-1)(Home net status, 0 =

Home Net).

“smsfull” a short message memorystorage in the MT hasbecome full (1), or memorylocations are available (0);i.e. the range is (0-1).

Example: AT+CIND=?

+CIND: ("battchg",(0-4)),("sig-

nal",(0-5)) ,("batterywarn-ing",(0-1))

,("chargerconnected",(0-

1)),("service",(0-

1)),("sounder",(0-1)),("mes-

sage",(0-1)),("call",(0-

1)),("roam",(0-1)),("sms-

full",(0-1))

OK

Page 107: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 107/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 108

Online Reference

+CPAS Mobile phone activity status 

Description: Returns the activity status of the mobile phone.

Execute command: +CPAS=<mode>

Options: <mode> 1 Allows the CPAS to return

Ericsson specific <pas>values, such as 129, 130and 131.

Returns: +CPAS: <pas>

<pas> 0 Ready.

3 Ringing.

4 Call in progress.

129 MMI in idle state. This is asubstate of (0) ready.

1. Operator, clock and date.

2. No conversion or data

call in progress.3. No submenus shown.

4. Only digits clear, *, NO,and # allowed.

130 Mobile oriented call inprogress. This is a sub-state to 'call in progress' (4).

131 Mobile terminated call inprogress. This is a sub-state to 'call in progress' (4).

Example: AT+CPAS=1

+CPAS: 0

OK

Test command: +CPAS=?

Example: AT+CPAS=?

Page 108: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 108/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 109

Online Reference

+CPAS: (0,3,4,129,130,131)

OK

Page 109: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 109/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 110

Online Reference

+CPIN Send Password 

Description: Sends the password to the ME, this is necessary to

make the ME operational.

Execute command: +CPIN=<pin>[,<newpin>]

Options: <pin> Numeric string type values.

<newpin> The range for SIM PIN andPH-SIM is 4-8 digits. SIMPUK consists of 8 digits.

Example: AT+CPIN="1234"

OK

Read command: +CPIN?

Returns: +CPIN: <code>

<code> READY ME has no pending requestfor any password.

SIM PIN ME is waiting SIM PIN to beentered.

SIM PUK ME waiting SIM PUK to beentered.

PH-SIM PIN ME waiting PHone to SIMpassword to be entered.

SIM PIN 2 ME waiting SIM PIN 2 to beentered. This <code> is

recommended to bereturned only when the last

executed commandresulted in PIN2authentication failure.

Page 110: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 110/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 111

Online Reference

SIM PUK 2ME waiting SIM PUK 2 to

be entered. (this <code> isrecommended to be

returned only when the lastexecuted commandresulted in PUK2authentication failure.

BLOCKEDSIM card blocked for user.

Example: AT+CPIN?

+CPIN: READY

OK

Test command: +CPIN=?

Example: AT+CPIN=?

+CPIN (READY,SIM PIN,SIM PUK,SIM PIN 2,

SIM PUK 2,PH-SIM PIN,BLOCKED)

OK

Page 111: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 111/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 112

Online Reference

+CBC Mobile phone battery charge 

Description: Returns the connection status and charge level of the

mobile phone battery.

Execute command: +CBC

Returns: +CBC: <bcs>,<bcl>

<bcs> 0 mobile phone is poweredby the battery.

1 mobile phone has the

battery connected but is notpowered by it.

2 mobile phone does nothave a battery connected.

<bcl> 0 battery discharged.

1-99 Battery charging level,battery has 1-99 percent ofcapacity remaining.

100 Battery fully charged.

Example: AT+CBC

+CBC: 0,50

OK ME powered by battery with50% capacity remaining.

Read command: +CBC? Returns (0-1),(0-100).

Returns: +CBC: <bcs>,<bcl>

Example: AT+CBC?

+CBC: 0,50

OK ME powered by battery with50% capacity remaining.

Test command: +CBC=? Returns (0-1),(0-100).

Example: AT+CBC=?

Page 112: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 112/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 113

Online Reference

+CBC: (0-2),(0-100)

OK

Page 113: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 113/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 114

Online Reference

+CSQ Mobile phone signal quality 

Description: Returns the signal strength and channel bit error rate at

the mobile phone. Test command returns valuessupported by the TA as compound values.

Execute command: +CSQ

Returns: +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

<rssi> 0 -113 dBm or less.

1 -111 dBm.

2-30 -109 dBm to -53 dBm.

31 -51 dBm or greater.

99 Not known or notdetectable.

<ber> 0-7 As RXQUAL values inGSM 05.08.

99 Not known or notdetectable.

Example: AT+CSQ

+CSQ: 0,0

OK

Test command: +CSQ=? Returns (0-31),(99).

Example: AT+CSQ=?

+CSQ: (0-31,99),(0-7,99)

OK

Page 114: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 114/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 115

Online Reference

+CMER Mobile equipment event reporting 

Description: Set command enables or disables the sending of

unsolicited results codes from TA to TE.

Set command: +CMER=[<mode>[,<keyp>{,<disp>[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]]]

<mode> 0 Buffer unsolicited result

codes in the TA.

3 Forward unsolicited resultcodes directly to the TE.

Default = 0.<keyp> 0 No keypad even reporting.

2 Keypad event reportingusing result code +CKEVAll key pressings areindicated.

Default = 0.

<disp> 0 No Display event reporting.

2 Display event reporting

using +CDEV. All eventsare indicated.

Default = 0.

<ind> 0 No indicator reporting.

1 Indicator reporting using

+CIEV. Only events notcaused by +CIND are

indicated.

Default = 0.

<bfr> 0 When mode (1..3) enteredTA buffer is cleared ofunsolicited result codes

defined within thiscommand.

Page 115: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 115/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 116

Online Reference

Example: AT+CMER=0,0,1,0,0

OK

Read Command: +CMER?

Example: AT+CMER?

+CMER: 0,0,1,0,0

OK

Test Command: +CMER=?

Example: AT+CMER=?

+CMER: (0,3),(0,2),(0,2),(0-1),(0)

OK

Page 116: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 116/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 117

Online Reference

+CVIB Vibrator Mode 

Description: used to enable and disable the vibrator alert feature of

the ME.

Set command: +CVIB=<mode>

<mode> 0 Disable.

1 Enable.

16 Enable when silent.

Example: AT+CVIB=0

OK

Read Command: +CVIB?

Example: AT+CVIB?

+CVIB: 0

OK

Test Command: +CVIB=?Example: AT+CVIB=?

+CMER: (0,1,16)

OK

Page 117: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 117/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 118

Online Reference

*ECAM Ericsson call monitoring 

Description: Activates or deactivates call monitoring. When the log

function is activated in the ME, the ME informs about callevents, such as incoming call, connected, hang up, etc..

Set command: *ECAM=<onoff>

Options: <onoff> 0 Activated.

1 Deactivated.

Returns: *ECAM: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>,

[<processid>],[<exitcause>][,<number>,<type>]Refer to *ECAV for a description.

Example: AT*ECAM=1

*ECAM: 1,1,1,,,084044864,129

OK

Read command: *ECAM?

Example: AT*ECAM?

*ECAM: 1

OK

Test command: *ECAM=?

Example: AT*ECAM=?

*ECAM: (0-1)

OK

Unsolicited Resultcode: *ECAV: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>,

[<processid>],[<exitcause>][,<number>,<type>]

Refer to *ECAV for a description.

Page 118: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 118/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 119

Online Reference

*EDME Ericsson enable data menus 

Description: Enables or disables data menus on the phone.

Set command: *EDME=<onoff>

Options: <onoff> 0 Disable call data menus.

1 Enable call data menus.

Default 0.

Example: AT*EDME=0

OK

Read command: *EDME?

Example: AT*EDME?

*EDME: 0

OK

Test command: *EDME=?

Example: AT*EDME=?

*EDME: (0-1)

OK

Page 119: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 119/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 120

Online Reference

*ELAN Ericsson Language 

Description: When the user has selected the language in the

interface the command sets the language in the ME.

Set command: *ELAN=<code>

Options: <code> “AUTO” Language is read from SIM

card. "AUTO" is neverreturned by the read-command.

“sv” Swedish.

“fi” Finnish.

“da” Danish.

“no” Norwegian.

“de” German.

“fr” French.

“es” Spanish.

“it” Italian.

“en” English.

“ae” American.

Example: AT*ELAN="sv"

OK

Read command: *ELAN? Current language.Example: AT*ELAN?

*ELAN: "sv"

OK

Test command: *ELAN=?

Example: AT*ELAN=?

*ELAN:(list of supported languages)

Page 120: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 120/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 121

Online Reference

OK

Page 121: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 121/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 122

Online Reference

*EMAR Ericsson master reset 

Description: Requests the ME to reset user data.

Set command: *EMAR=<phone lock code>

Options: <phonelock code>

String Security code (Phone Lockcode) must be verified

before performing themaster reset.

Example: AT*EMAR="8765"

OK

Read command: *EMAR=?

Example: AT*EMAR=?

OK

Page 122: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 122/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 123

Online Reference

*ERIL Ericsson ring level set 

Description: Sets the ring volume level. Note that the <place>-

parameter should be ignored for phones with profilefeatures.

Set command: *ERIL=<volume>[,<call type>[,<place>]]

Options: <volume> 0 Off.

1-6 Volume setting, notincreasing ring.

129-134 Volume setting, increasingring.

<call type> 1 Line 1. Default=1.

2 Line 2.

3 Fax.

4 Data.

<place> 0 Hand held. Default=0.

1 Car mounted.

Example: AT*ERIL=3,1,1

OK

Read command: *ERIL?

Example: AT*ERIL?

*ERIL: 3,1,1

*ERIL: 3,2,1

*ERIL: 4,3,0

*ERIL: 6,4,0

OK

Test command: *ERIL=?

Example: AT*ERIL

Page 123: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 123/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 124

Online Reference

*ERIL: (0-6,129-134),(1-4),(0-1)

OK

Page 124: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 124/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 125

Online Reference

*ERIN Ericsson ring set 

Description: Sets the ring type for incoming calls.

Set command: *ERIN=<sound type>,[<call type>]

Options: <soundtype>

1 Low ring signal.

2 Medium ring signal.

3 High ring signal.

4 Mixed ring signal.

11-20 Melody 1-10 - preset.

31-34 Own melodies 1-4.

<call type> 1 Line 1. Default=1.

2 Line 2.

3 Fax.

4 Data.

5 Alarm.

Example: AT*ERIN=1,1

OK

Read command: *ERIN?

Example: AT*ERIN?

*ERIN:1,1

OK

Test command: *ERIN=?

Example: AT*ERIN=?

*ERIN:(1-4,11-20,31-34),(1-5)

OK

Page 125: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 125/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 126

Online Reference

*ERIP Ericsson ring signal playback command 

Description: Used to play one of the sound types that are available as

a ring signal on the phone.

Set command: *ERIP=<volume>,<sound type>

Options: <volume> 0 Off.

1 Step.

2-7 Volume setting.

<sound

type>

1 Low ring signal.

2 Medium ring signal.

3 High ring signal.

4 Mixed ring signal.

11 Melody 1.

12-20 Melody 2-20 - preset.

31-34 Own melodies 1-4.

Example: AT*ERIP=3,3

OK

Test command: *ERIP=?

Example: AT*ERIP=?

*ERIP: (0-7),(1-4,11-20,31-34)

OK

Page 126: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 126/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 127

Online Reference

*ESIL Ericsson silence command 

Description: Sets silent mode on the phone. An icon will be displayed

when the phone is in silent mode.

Set command: *ESIL=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Off.

1 On.

Example: AT*ESIL=0

OK

Read command: *ESIL?

Example: AT*ESIL?

*ESIL: 0

OK

Test command: *ESIL=?

Example: AT*ESIL=?

*ESIL: (0-1)

OK

Page 127: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 127/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 128

Online Reference

*ESKL Ericsson settings key lock mode 

Description: Sets the key lock mode of the MS.

Set command: *ESKL=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Manual.

1 Automatic.

Example: AT*ESKL=1

OK

Read command: *ESKL?Example: AT*ESKL?

*ESKL: 1

OK

Test command: *ESKL=?

Example: AT*ESKL=?

*ESKL: (0-1)

OK

Page 128: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 128/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 129

Online Reference

*ESKS Ericsson settings key sound 

Description: Sets the key sound mode of the MS.

Set command: *ESKS=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Silent.

1 Click.

2 Tone.

Example: AT*ESKS=2

OK

Read command: *ESKS?

Example: AT*ESKS?

*ESKS: 2

OK

Test command: *ESKS=?

Example: AT*ESKS=?

*ESKS: (0-2)

OK

Page 129: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 129/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 130

Online Reference

*ESMA Ericsson set message alert sound 

Description: Sets the message alert sound of the MS.

Set command: *ESMA=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Silent.

1 Click.

2 Tone.

Example: AT*ESMA=1

OK

Read command: *ESMA?

Example: AT*ESMA?

*ESMA: 1

OK

Test command: *ESMA=?

Example: AT*ESMA=?

*ESMA: (0-2)

OK

Page 130: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 130/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 131

Online Reference

*ESMM Ericsson settings minute minder 

Description: Sets the minute minder on or off in the MS.

Set command: *ESMM=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Minute minder Off.

1 Minute minder On.

Example: AT*ESMM=0

OK

Read command: *ESMM?Example: AT*ESMM?

*ESMM: 0

OK

Test command: *ESMM=?

Example: AT*ESMM=?

*ESMM: (0-1)

OK

Page 131: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 131/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 132

Online Reference

*ESAM Ericsson settings answer mode 

Description: Sets the answer mode settings in the MS.

Set command: *ESAM=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Answer Mode is neither setto "Any key", nor "Auto"

(off).

1 Any Key Mode on.

2 Auto Mode on.

Example: AT*ESAM=2

OK

Read command: *ESAM?

Example: AT*ESAM?

*ESAM: 2

OK

Test command: *ESAM=?

Example: AT*ESAM=?

*ESAM: (0-2)

OK

Page 132: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 132/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 133

Online Reference

*ESBL Ericsson settings back light mode 

Description: Sets the back light mode of the MS. Note that the

<place>-parameter should be ignored for phones withprofile features.

Set command: *ESBL=<place>,<mode>

Options: <place> 0 Handheld.

1 Car mounted.

<mode> 0 Always off.

1 Always on.

2 AUTO, back light is turnedon when the ME reacts to auser event or whenreceiving a call. The light isthen turned off after shortwhile.

Example: AT*ESBL=0,1

OK

Read command: *ESBL?

Example: AT*ESBL?

*ESBL: 0,1

*ESBL: 1,1

OK

Test command: *ESBL=?

Example: AT*ESBL=?

*ESBL: (0-1),(0-2)

OK

Page 133: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 133/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 134

Online Reference

*ESDF Ericsson settings date format 

Description: Sets the date information format in the MS.

Set command: *ESDF=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Off.

1 DD-MMM-YY

2 DD-MM-YY

3 MM/DD/YY

4 DD/MM/YY5 DD.MM.YY

6 YYMMDD

7 YY-MM-DD

Example: AT*ESDF=1

OK

Read command: *ESDF?

Example: AT*ESDF?

*ESDF: 1

OK

Test command: *ESDF=?

Example: AT*ESDF=?

*ESDF: (0-7)

OK

Page 134: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 134/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 135

Online Reference

*ESOM Ericsson settings own melody 

Description: Sets the user defined own melody in the MS.

Set command: *ESOM=<melody index>,<melody string>

Options: <melodyindex>

1-4 Melody 1-4.

<melodystring>

string A sequence of <tones> and<pause> entries. The<tones> may be preceded

by one or two <prefix>.

Melody characteristics: <p> p Pause.

<prefix> # Half tone higher.

(b) Half tone lower.

+ One octave higher.

<tones> c,d,e,f,g,a,b,c

Short tones.

C,D,E,F,G,A,B,C

Long tones.

Example: AT*ESOM=1,"aAffFgaAgfEpgGefgeafDC"

OK (The Swedish national anthem).

Page 135: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 135/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 136

Online Reference

Read command: *ESOM?

Example: AT*ESOM?

*ESOM: 1,"aAffFgaAgfEpgGefgeafDC"

OK

Test command: *ESOM=?

Response: (list of supported <melody index>),(list ofsupported <pause>s),(list of supported<prefix>s),(list of supported <tone>s),

<mlength>,<mtones>

where: <mlength> integer maximum length of

<melody string>

<mtones> integer maximum number of tonesin <melody string>

Example: AT*ESOM=?

*ESOM: (1-4), ('p'), ('#','

(b)','+'),

('c','d',.....,'A','B'),120,40

OK

Page 136: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 136/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 137

Online Reference

*ESTF Ericsson settings time format 

Description: Sets the time format of the time information in the MS.

Set command: *ESTF=<mode>

Options: <mode> 1 HH:MM.

2 HH:MM a.m./p.m.

Example: AT*ESTF=1

OK

Read command: *ESTF?Example: AT*ESTF?

*ESTF: 1

OK

Test command: *ESTF=?

Example: AT*ESTF=?

*ESTF: (1-2)

OK

Page 137: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 137/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 138

Online Reference

*ETXT Ericsson text command 

Description: Sets and activates the greetings text in the MS.

Set command: *ETXT=<onoff>[,<text>]

Options: <onoff> 0 Set text off.

1 Set text on.

2 Standard.

<text> string Free text to display.

Example: AT*ETXT=1,"Hello"

OK

Read command: *ETXT?

Example: AT*ETXT?

*ETXT: 1,"Hello"

OK

Test command: *ETXT=?

Response: <ltext> integer Maximum length ofcharacters in <text>.

Example: AT*ETXT=?

*ETXT: (0-2),24

OK

Page 138: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 138/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 139

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

+CKEV Keypad event 

Description: Is enabled with the AT+CMER command and indicateskey press/release.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CKEV: <key>,<press>

Defined values: <key> # Hash(number).

* Star(*).0... 9 Number keys.

< Left arrow.

> Right arrow.

C/c Clear display (C/CLR).

D/d Volume down.

E/e Connection end.

S/s Connection start (SEND).

U/u Volume up.

<press> 0 Key released

1 Key pressed

Example: AT+CMER=,2,,1, Request unsolicited result

codes for keypad- andindicator events.

OK

+CKEV: 49,1 Number-key "1" is pressed

+CKEV: 49,0 Number-key "1" is released

Page 139: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 139/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 140

Online Reference

+CIEV Indicator event reporting 

Description: Is enabled with the AT+CMER command and indicates

changes in indicator levels.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CIEV: <ind>,<value>

Defined values: <ind> 1 Battery charge levelindicator

2 Signal quality indicator

3 Battery warning indicator4 Charger connected

indicator

5 Service availabilityindicator

6 Sounder activity indicator

7 Message received

indicator

8 Call in progress indicator

9 Transmit activated by voiceactivity indicator

10 Roaming indicator

11 Short message memorystorage indicator in the MS.

<value> Integer New value of the specificindicator.

Example: AT+CMER=,2,,1, Request unsolicited resultcodes for keypad- andindicator events.

OK

+CIEV: 2,5 Signal strength indicatorchanges its state to 5

Page 140: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 140/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 141

Online Reference

*ECAV Ericsson Call Monitoring event 

Description: Reports changes in call state indicated by <ccid>.

Unsolicited Result

code: *ECAV: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>,[<processid>],[<exitcause>][,<number>,<type>]

Defined values: <ccid> 1..7 Uniquely defines a call.

<ccstatus> 0 IDLE.

1 CALLING (MO).

2 CONNECTING (MO).

3 ACTIVE (connectionbetween A and B).

4 HOLD.

5 WAITING (MT).

6 ALERTING (MT).

7 BUSY.

<calltype> 1 VOICE.

2 DATA.

4 FAX.

128 VOICE2.

<processid>integer Reports return to IDLE.

8=H’08 CC (Call Control).

68=H’44 MM (Mobile Management).

69=H’45 MS (Mobile station).

122=H7A RR (Radio Resources).

<exitcause>integer Exit cause according toGSM 04.08. Reports return

to IDLE (<ccstatus>=0).

Page 141: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 141/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 142

Online Reference

<number> string String type phone number

as specified by <type>.Valid only for

<ccstatus>=1.

<type> integer Address octet in integerformat (see GSM 04.08subclause 10.5.4.7).Default 145 when dialingstring includes "+",

otherwise 129.Valid only for

<ccstatus>=1.

Example: ATD08044864; Dial number.

OK

*ECAV:

1,1,1,,,08404486

4,129

CALLING

*ECAV: 1,2,1,, CONNECTING

*ECAV: 1,3,1,, ACTIVE CALL

AT+CHLD=2 Put call on hold

OK

*ECAV: 1,4,1,, HOLD indication

AT+CHLD=2 Retrieve held call

OK*ECAV: 1,3,1,, ACTIVE call again

ATH Hang up

OK

*ECAV:

1,0,1,8,16

IDLE. Call Control (CC) exitcause 16 (normal clearing)

Example: RING Incoming call

*ECAV: 1,6,128,, ALERTING (VOICE2)

Page 142: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 142/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 143

Online Reference

RING

RING

ATA Answer call

OK

*ECAV: 1,3,1,, ACTIVE call indication.

*ECAV:

1,0,1,8,16

Remote party hangs up.IDLE call state entered.

Call Control (CC) exitcause 16 (normal clearing).

Page 143: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 143/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 144

Online Reference

4.10 Ensemble S11/C/E : GSM SMS and CBS PDU Mode

+CSMS Select SMS message service 

Description: Defines the message service and returns thefunctionality of the message service in the form:

Set command: +CSMS=<service>

Options: <service> 0 GSM 03.40 and 03.41specific. (the syntax ofSMS AT commands is

compatible with GSM 07.05Phase 2 version 4.7.0;

Phase 2+ features whichdo not require newcommand syntax may besupported (e.g. correctrouting of messages withnew Phase 2+ data coding

schemes))Default=0.

1 GSM 03.40 and 03.41

specific. (the syntax ofSMS AT commands iscompatible with GSM 07.05Phase 2+ version; therequirement of <service>setting 1 is mentioned

under correspondingcommand descriptions).

2-127 Reserved. Not Supported.

Response: +CSMS:<mt>,<mo>,<bm>

<mt> 0 Mobile terminatedmessages not supported.

1 Mobile terminatedmessages supported.

Page 144: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 144/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 145

Online Reference

<mo> 0 Mobile originated

messages not supported.

1 Mobile originatedmessages supported.

<bm> 0 Broadcast messages notsupported.

1 Broadcast messagessupported.

Example: AT+CSMS=0

+CSMS: 1,1,0

OK

Read command: +CSMS?

Response: +CSMS:<service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>

Example: AT+CSMS?

+CSMS: 1,1,0

OK

Test command: +CSMS=?

Response: +CSMS:<list of supported services>

Example: AT+CSMS=?

+CSMS: (0-1)

OK

Page 145: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 145/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 146

Online Reference

+CPMS Preferred SMS message storage 

Description: Set command selects memory storage <mem1>,

<mem2> and <mem3> to be used for reading, writing,etc..

Set command: +CPMS=<mem1>,[<mem2>],[<mem3>]

Options: <mem1> Memory from which messages areread and deleted

“ME” ME message storage.

“SM” SIM message storage.<mem2> Memory to which writing and sending

operations are made

“ME” ME message storage.

“SM” SIM message storage.Default="SM"

<mem3> Memory to which received SMs are

preferred to be stored“ME” ME message storage.

Response: +CPMS:<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2><used3>,<total3>

Where: <used1>,<used2>,<used3>

Total number of messagescurrently in <mem1>,<mem2> and <mem3>respectively.

<total1>,<total2>,<total3>

Total number of messagelocations in <mem1>,<mem2> and <mem3>respectively.

Memory 1 storage is used to list, read and delete messages (+CMGL,+CMGR and +CMGD) whilst memory 2 is used to write and send messages(+CMGW and +CMSS).

Example: AT+CPMS="SM","SM"

Page 146: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 146/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 147

Online Reference

+CPMS: 3,20,3,20

OK

Read command: +CPMS? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CPMS?

+CPMS: "ME",5,10,"SM",3,20,"ME",5,10

OK

Test command: +CPMS=? Always returns

(ME,SM),(ME,SM),(ME).

Example: AT+CPMS=?

+CPMS: ("ME","SM"),("ME","SM"),

("ME")

OK

Page 147: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 147/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 148

Online Reference

+CMGL List messages 

Description: Returns messages with status value <stat> from

preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE.

Set command: +CMGL=[<stat>]

Options: <stat> 0 Received unread

messages.Default=0.

1 Received read messages.

2 Stored unsent messages.(only applicable to SMs)

3 Stored sent messages.(only applicable to SMs)

4 All messages (only appli-cable to +CMGL com-mand).

16 Template message.

Returns: <index> Integer Integer value in the rangeof location numberssupported by theassociated memory.

[<alpha>] String Manufacturing specific.Should be left empty butnot omitted.

<length> Integer Value indicating in PDUmode (+CMGF=0), the

length of the actual TP dataunit in octets.

Page 148: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 148/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 149

Online Reference

<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM

04.11 SC address followedby GSM 03.40 TPDU in

hexadecimal format: ME/ TA converts each octet ofTP data unit into two IRAcharacter long

hexadecimal number. Inthe case of CBS: GSM03.41 TPDU inhexadecimal format.

Example 1: AT+CMGL=0 Messages received andunread.

+CMGL: 1,0,,128<128 byte pdu>

OK

Example 2: AT+CMGL=2

+CMGL: 2,0,68<68 byte pdu>

OK

Example 3: AT+CMGL=1 List received messages.

OK None received.

Example 4: AT+CMGL=2 List stored unsentmessages. None stored.

Example 5: AT+CMGL=3 List stored sent messages.

+CMGL: 1,3,,32<32 byte pdu>OK Message in index 1 of SM

is stored and sent.

Test command: +CMGL=?

Example: AT+CMGL=?

+CMGL: (4)

OK

Page 149: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 149/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 150

Online Reference

+CMGR Read message 

Description: Returns message with location value <index> from

preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Status ofthe message and entire message data unit <pdu> isreturned.

Set command: +CMGR=<index>

Options: <index> Integer Value in the range oflocation numberssupported by the

associated memory.Returns: <stat> 0 Received unread.

1 Received read.

2 Stored unsent (only

applicable to SMs).

3 Stored sent (only

applicable to SMs).

16 Template message.

[<alpha>] String Manufacturing specific.Should be left empty butnot omitted.

<length> Integer Value indicating in PDUmode (+CMGF=0), thelength of the actual TP data

unit in octets.

Page 150: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 150/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 151

Online Reference

<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM

04.11 SC address followedby GSM 03.40 TPDU in

hexadecimal format: ME/TAconverts each octet of TPdata unit into two IRAcharacter long hexadecimal

number. In the case of CBS:GSM 03.41 TPDU inhexadecimal format.

Example: AT+CMGR=2

+CMGR: 0,,68 <64 byte pdu>

OK

Test command: +CMGR=?

Example: AT+CMGR=?

OK

Page 151: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 151/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 152

Online Reference

+CMGS Send SMS messages 

Description: Sends a message to the phone network. On successful

delivery a message reference number is returned.Sending can be cancelled by sending the ESC

character.

Set command: +CMGS=<length><CR><pdu is given><CTRL-Z/ ESC>

Options: <length> Integer Value indicating in PDUmode (+CMGF=0), the

length of the actual TP dataunit in octets.

Returns: <mr> Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integerformat.

[,<ackpdu>]

GSM 03.40 RP-User-Dataelement of RP-ACK PDU;

format is same as for

<pdu> in case of SMS, butwithout GSM 04.11 SCaddress field andparameter shall bebounded by double quote

characters like a normalstring type parameter.

Example: AT+CMGS=35<CR><35 byte pdu><CTRL-Z>

+CMGS: 13

OK

Test command: +CMGS=?

Example: AT+CMGS=?

OK

Page 152: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 152/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 153

Online Reference

+CMSS Send from storage 

Description: Sends message with location value <index> from

message storage <mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). Reference value <mr> isreturned to the TE on successful message delivery.

Set command: +CMSS=<index>

Options: <index> Integer Value in the range oflocation numberssupported by the

associated memory.Returns: <mr> Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Message-

Reference in integerformat.

Example: AT+CMSS=1

+CMSS:.12

OK

Test command: +CMSS=?

Example: AT+CMSS=?

OK

Page 153: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 153/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 154

Online Reference

+CMGW Write message to memory 

Description: stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory

location <index> of the stored message is returned.

Set command: +CMGW=<length>[,<stat>],<CR><pdu isgiven><CTRL-Z/ESC>

Options: <length> Integer Value indicating in PDUmode (+CMGF=0), thelength of the actual TP dataunit in octets.

<stat> 2 Stored unsent message.

Default = 2.

<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM04.11 SC address followed

by GSM 03.40 TPDU inhexadecimal format: ME/ TA converts each octet ofTP data unit into two IRAcharacter longhexadecimal number. In

the case of CBS: GSM03.41 TPDU inhexadecimal format

Returns: <index> Integer Value in the range oflocation numberssupported by the

associated memory.

Example: AT+CMGW=128<CR><128 byte pdu><CTRL-Z>

+CMGW: 2 Message stored at index 2.

OK

Test command: +CMGW=?

Example: AT+CMGW=?

OK

Page 154: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 154/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 155

Online Reference

+CMGD Delete message 

Description: Deletes message from preferred message storage

<mem1> location <index>.

Set command: +CMGD=<index>

Options: <index> Integer Value in the range of

location numberssupported by theassociated memory.

Example: AT+CMGD=2

OK Delete read message at

index 2 in <mem1>.

Test command: +CMGD=?

Example: AT+CMGD=?

OK

Page 155: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 155/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 156

Online Reference

+CMGF Message format 

Description: Informs the TA which input and output format of

messages to use.

Set command: +CMGF=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 PDU mode.

Example: AT+CMGF=0 Select PDU mode.

OK

Read command: +CMGF?

Example: AT+CMGF?

+CMGF: 0 PDU mode.

OK

Test command: +CMGF=?

Example: AT+CMGF=?

+CMGF: (0) Only PDU mode available.

OK

Page 156: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 156/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 157

Online Reference

+CSCA SMS service centre address 

Description: Updates the SMSC address which is used to originate

mobile Short Message Service transmissions.

Set command: +CSCA=<sca>[,<tosca>]

Options: <sca> String GSM 04.11 RP SC address

Address-Value field instring format; BCDnumbers (or GSM defaultalphabet characters) are

converted to characters ofthe currently selected TE

character set.

<tosca> 128 - 255 Other values refer GSM04.08 section 10.5.4.7

129 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan, national / 

international unknown.

145 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan,

international number.

161 ISDN / telephony

numbering plan, nationalnumber.

If a ‘+’ is included in the

phone number (number)then a default of 145 isused. In all other cases adefault value of 129 isapplied.

Example: AT+CSCA="+358501234589"

OK Change SCA.

Read command: +CSCA? Returns the current setting.

Page 157: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 157/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 158

Online Reference

Example: AT+CSCA?

+CSCA: "358501234567",145

OK

Test command: +CSCA=?

Example: AT+CSCA=?

+CSCA: (128-255)

OK

Page 158: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 158/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 159

Online Reference

+CSCB Select cell broadcast message type 

Description: Selects the type of cell message broadcasts to be

received by the ME.

Set command: +CSCB=[<mode>[,<mids>],[<dcss>]]

Options: <mode> 0 Message types in <mids>

accepted.

<mids> string All possible combinations ofmessage identifiers.

<dcss> string All possible combinations ofcoding schemes.

Example: AT+CSCB=0 Accept <mids> messages.

OK

Read command: +CSCB?

Example: AT+CSCB?

+CSCB: 0

OK

Test command: +CSCB=?

Example: AT+CSCB=?

+CSCB: (0)

OK

Page 159: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 159/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 160

Online Reference

+CSAS Save Settings 

Description: Saves active message service settings to a non-volatile

memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings.Settings specified in commands Service Centre Address+CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and SelectCell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented)are saved.

Set command: +CSAS[=<profile>]

Options: <profile> 0..255 Manufacturer specific

profile number wheresettings are to be stored

Example: AT+CSAS Save settings.

OK

Test command: +CSAS=?

Example: AT+CSAS=?

+CSAS: (0)

OK

Page 160: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 160/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 161

Online Reference

+CRES Restore Settings 

Description: restores message service settings from non-volatile

memory to active memory. A TA can contain severalprofiles of settings. Settings specified in commandsService Centre Address +CSCA, Set MessageParameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast MessageTypes +CSCB (if implemented) are restored.

Set command: +CRES[=<profile>]

Options: <profile> 0..255 Manufacturer specific

profile number wheresettings are to be stored

Example: AT+CRES Restore settings.

OK

Test command: +CRES=?

Example: AT+CRES=?

+CRES: (0)

OK

Page 161: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 161/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 162

Online Reference

+CNMI New message indication to TE 

Description: Selects the procedure that sets how new messages are

indicated on the TE.

Set command: +CNMI=[<mode>[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,<bfr>]]]]]

Options: <mode> 3 Forward unsolicited result

codes directly to the TE.TA-TE link specific inbandtechnique used to embedresult codes and data when

TA is in on-line data mode.<mt> 0 No SMS-DELIVER

indications are routed to theTE.Default=0.

1 If SMS-DELIVER is storedinto ME/TA, indication of the

memory location is routed to

the TE using unsolicitedresult code: +CMTI:<mem>,<index>

3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs arerouted directly to TE usingunsolicited result codes+CMT:<length><CR><LF><pdu>.

Messages of other datacoding schemes result inindication as defined in<mt>=1.

<bm> 0 Store message to "BM" (orsome manufacturer specificmemory). No CBMindications are routed to the

TE.Default=0.

Page 162: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 162/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 163

Online Reference

2 New CBMs are routed

directly to the TE usingunsolicited result

code:+CBM:<length><CR><LF><pdu>(PDU mode enabled).

<ds> 0 NoSMS-STATUS-REPORTsare forwarded to the TE.

<bfr> 1 TA buffer of unsolicitedresult codes defined within

this command are clearedwhen <mode> 1...2 is

entered (OK response shallbe given before flushing thecodes).

Example: AT+CNMI=3,1,2,0 Send SM indications to TE.

OK

Page 163: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 163/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 164

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

+CBM New Message Indication 

Description: Cell broadcast message.

Read command: +CNMI?

Example 1: AT+CNMI?

+CNMI: 3,1,2,0

OK

Test command: +CNMI=?

Example: AT+CNMI=?

+CNMI: (3),(0-3),(0,2),(0)

OK

Unsolicited Result

codes: +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CBM: <length> <CR><LF><pdu>

Received when CBMs arerouted directly to the TE.

Defined values: <length> integer The length of the actual TPdata unit in octets.

<pdu> For SMS: GSM 04.11 SCaddress followed by GSM03.40 TPDU in hex format.

For CBS: GSM 03.41TPDU in hex format.

Page 164: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 164/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 165

Online Reference

+CMTI New Message Indication 

Description: Indicates the memory location where the message

routed to the TE is located.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CMTI:<mem>, <index>

When a message has beenreceivedandSMS-DELIVERis stored into ME/TA.

Defined values: <mem> ME ME message storage.

SM SIM message storage.

<index> integer Value in the range oflocation numberssupported by the

associated memory.

Page 165: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 165/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 166

Online Reference

+CMT Received Message 

Description: The command AT+CNMI selects the procedure of how

the receiving of new messages from the network isindicated to the TE when the TE is active. Received SMsare routed directly to the TE using unsolicited resultcode.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +CMT:<length>, <pdu>

When a message has been

receivedandSMS-DELIVERis stored into ME/TA.

Defined values: <length> Integer Value indicating in PDUmode (+CMGF=0), thelength of the actual TP data

unit in octets (i.e. the RPlayer SMSC address octetsare not counted in thelength)

<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM04.11 SC address followedby GSM 03.40 TPDU inhexadecimal format: ME/ 

TA converts each octet ofTP data unit into two IRAcharacter longhexadecimal number (e.g.

octet with integer value 42is presented to TE as two

characters 2A (IRA 50 and65))In the case of CBS:GSM 03.41 TPDU inhexadecimal format

Page 166: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 166/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 167

Online Reference

+CMS Report operational/access failure (+CMS) 

The +CMS ERROR result codes indicate an error relating to the Infrared

Modem, Mobile Phone or Network relating to the Short Message Service(SMS) and replaces the final result code ERROR.

+CMS ERROR: 0 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values.

to

+CMS ERROR: 127

+CMS ERROR: 128 GSM 03.40 Section 9.2.3.22 values.

to

+CMS ERROR: 255

+CMS ERROR: 300 Mobile phone failure.

+CMS ERROR: 301 Short message service of mobile phonereserved.

+CMS ERROR: 302 Operation not allowed.

+CMS ERROR: 303 Operation not supported.

+CMS ERROR: 304 Invalid PDU mode parameter.

+CMS ERROR: 305 Invalid text mode parameter.

+CMS ERROR: 310 SIM card not inserted.

+CMS ERROR: 311 SIM card PIN necessary.

+CMS ERROR: 312 SIM card PIN necessary for PH-SIM.

+CMS ERROR: 313 SIM card failure.

+CMS ERROR: 314 SIM card busy.

+CMS ERROR: 315 SIM card wrong.

Page 167: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 167/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 168

Online Reference

+CMS ERROR: 316 SIM PUK required

+CMS ERROR: 317 SIM PIN2 required

+CMS ERROR: 318 SIM PUK2 required

+CMS ERROR: 320 Memory failure.

+CMS ERROR: 321 Invalid memory index.

+CMS ERROR: 322 Memory full.

+CMS ERROR: 330 SMSC address unknown.

+CMS ERROR: 331 No network service.

+CMS ERROR: 332 Network timeout.

+CMS ERROR: 340 no +CNMA acknowledgement expected

+CMS ERROR: 500 Unknown error.

+CMS ERROR: ...511 range 256...511 reserved

+CMS ERROR: 512... manufacturer specific

Page 168: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 168/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 169

Online Reference

4.11 Ensemble S14/E : GSM Digital Binary Ping Pong Mode

*BINARY Start binary mode 

Description: Sets the AT phone in digital binary mode.

Set command: *BINARY

Example: AT*BINARY

CONNECT Set phone in digital binarymode.

Page 169: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 169/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 170

Online Reference

4.12 Ensemble S16/C/E : GSM Phonebook Commands

+CPBS Select mobile phone phonebook memory storage 

Description: Selects phonebook memory storage <storage>, which isused by other phonebook commands.

Set command: +CPBS=<storage>

Options: <storage> “FD” SIM fix-dialing-phonebook.Only in reference point E.

“LD” SIM last-dialing-phonebook.

“ME” ME phonebook.

“SM” SIM phonebook.

“DC” ME dialed calls list.

“RC” ME received calls list.

“MC” ME missed calls list.

“MV” ME Voice Activated Dialinglist.

Example: AT+CPBS="SM"

OK

Read command: +CPBS? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CPBS?

+CPBS: "SM"

OK

Test command: +CPBS=?

Example: AT+CPBS=?

+CPBS: ("LD","ME","SM",

"DC","RC","MC","MV")

OK

Page 170: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 170/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 171

Online Reference

+CPBR Read mobile phone phonebook entries 

Description: Returns the phonebook entries from index1 to index2 as

stored on the SIM card or in the Mobile Phone memory.Use the AT+CPBS command (see previous page) toselect one of these memories. The default is the SIMmemory.

Set command: +CPBR=<index1>,[<index2>]

Options: <index1> Number location, start.

<index2> Number location, end.

Returns: <indexn> Integer entry to be read.

<number> String number of <type>format.

<type> Integer format type ofaddress.

<text> Field of <tlength>maximum length.

Example: AT+CPBR=1,4

+CPBR: 1,"931123456",129,"FREDRIK"

+CPBR: 2,"9501234567",129,"MAGNUS"

+CPBR: 2,"901234567",129,"LARS"

OK

Page 171: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 171/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 172

Online Reference

Test command: +CPBR=? Returns (1-100),20,18.

The returned values are the

number of entries availablein the current phone bookmemory, the maximumlength of the phone numberand the maximum length ofthe text. These values canvary between different SIM

cards and mobile phones.The result from this test

command depends on thephonebook storage chosenwith AT+CPBS

Returns: <nlength> Integer value of maximumlength of field <number>.

<tlength> Integer value of maximumlength of field <text>.

Example: AT+CPBR=?

+CPBR: (1-100),20,18

OK

Page 172: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 172/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 173

Online Reference

+CPBF Phonebook Find 

Description: Returns phonebook entries (from the current phonebook

memory storage selected with +CPBS) whichalphanumeric field start with string <findtext>.

Set command: +CPBF=<findtext>

Options: <findtext> String Field of maximum length<tlength>; character set asspecified by commandSelect TE Character Set

+CSCS.Returns: <indexn> Integer entry to be read.

<number> String number of <type>format.

<type> Integer format type ofaddress.

<text> Field of <tlength>

maximum length.

Example: AT+CPBF="MAGNUS"

+CPBF: 2,"9501234567",129,"MAGNUS"

OK

Page 173: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 173/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 174

Online Reference

Test command: +CPBF=? Returns (1-100),20,18.

The returned values are the

number of entries availablein the current phone bookmemory, the maximumlength of the phone numberand the maximum length ofthe text. These values canvary between different SIM

cards and mobile phones.

Returns: <nlength> Integer value of maximumlength of field <number>.

<tlength> Integer value of maximumlength of field <text>.

Example: AT+CPBF=?

+CPBF: 80,20

OK

Page 174: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 174/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 175

Online Reference

+CPBW Write mobile phone phonebook entries 

Description: Store entries in the phonebook.

Set command: +CPBW=[<index>],[<number>,[<type>,[<text>]]]

Options: <index> Location number for thestorage of the phone

details. If omitted then thefirst free location isassigned.

<number> String Phone number.

<type> 128-255 Type of ISDN/Phone

numbering plan.

129 Nationality unknown.

145 International.

161 National.

If a ‘+’ is included in the

phone number <number>then a default of 145 isused, in all other cases adefault value of 129 isapplied.

<text> String Name or description of thephone number.

Page 175: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 175/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 176

Online Reference

Example 1: AT+CPBW=3,"921123456",,"Mikael"

OK

The new entry overwritesposition 3 in thephonebook.

Example 2: AT+CPBW=4 Clear entry 4 in thephonebook.

OK

Test command: +CPBW=? Returns (1-100),20,(128-255),20.

The returned values are

the number of entriesavailable in the currentphone book memory, themaximum length of thephone number and themaximum length of the

text. These values can vary

between different SIMcards and mobile phones.The result from this testcommand depends on thephonebook storage

chosen with AT+CPBS.

Example: AT+CPBW=?

+CPBW: (1-100),20,(128-255),20

OK

Page 176: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 176/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 177

Online Reference

*ECAR Ericsson Callers Allowed Read 

Description: Execution command returns calls allowed index,

groupname if applicable, storage and phonebook index.

Set command: *ECAR=<CAindex1>[, <CAindex2>]

Defined values

<CAindexn>:

Integer Start value of location number.

Response: <CAindex>,[<groupname>][,<stor-age>,<PBindex>]

<groupname>: String Name of callers allowed group.<storage>: String “SM” SIM phonebook

“ME” Mobile phonebook

<PBindex>: Integer Values in the range of location

numbers of phonebook memory

Example: AT*ECAR=1,5 List callers allowed

between index 1 and 5 in

the "callers allowed"-list

*ECAR: 1,,"ME",15

*ECAR: 4,,"SM",34

*ECAR: 5,"Work"

OK

Test command: *ECAR=?

Returns: (list of supported <CAindex>s),<gn_length>,(list of

supported <storage>s)

Example: AT*ECAR=?

*ECAR: (1-10),18, ("SM","ME")

OK

Page 177: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 177/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 178

Online Reference

*ECAW Ericsson Callers Allowed Write 

Description: Command is used for writing entries to and removing

entries from the Callers Allowed (CA) list.

Set command: *ECAW=[<CAindex>],[<storage>,<PBindex>]

Defined values

<CAindex>:

Integer Values in the range of location

numbers of CA list.

<storage>: String “SM” SIM phonebook

“ME” Mobile phonebook

<PBindex>: Integer Values in the range of locationnumbers of phonebook memory

Example: AT*ECAW=,"ME",5 Write ME PB entry 5 to firstfree position in CA list.

OK

Test command: *ECAW=?

Returns: (list of supported <CAindex>s),(list of supported<storage>s)

Example: AT*ECAW=?

*ECAW: (1-10), ("SM","ME")

OK

Page 178: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 178/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 179

Online Reference

*EPRR Ericsson Personal Ringtype Read 

Description: Returns phone number, phone number type and sound

type in location number <indexr>.

Set command: *EPRR= <indexr>

Options: <indexr> 1..10 Value of location number

Returns: <indexr>

<number> String Phone number of format<type>.

<type> Integer Type of address octet(refer GSM 04.08 [4]section 10.5.4.7)

128-255 Other values refer GSM04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7.

129 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan, national / international unknown.

145 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan,international number.

161 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan, nationalnumber.

If a ‘+’ is included in the

phone number <number>then a default of 145 is

used, in all other cases adefault value of 129 isapplied.

<soundtype>

1 Low ring signal.

2 Medium ring signal.

Page 179: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 179/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 180

Online Reference

3 High ring signal.

4 Mixed ring signal.

11-20 Melody 1-10 - preset.

31-34 Own melodies 1-4.

Example: AT*EPRR=4

EPRR:

4,046194533,2

Phone number 046194533and ringtype 2 for index 4

in personal ringtype list.

OK

Test command: *EPRR=?

Returns: (list of supported<indexr>s)

Example: AT*EPRR=?

EPRR: (1-10)

OK

Page 180: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 180/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 181

Online Reference

*EPRW Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write 

Description: Writes phone number, phone number type and sound

type in location number <indexr>. It is possible to usewild cards for phone number.

Set command: *EPRW= <indexr>,<number>,<type>,<ringtype>

Options: <indexr> 1..10 Value of location number

<number> String Phone number of format<type>.

<type> Integer Type of address octet(refer GSM 04.08 [4]

section 10.5.4.7)

128-255 Other values refer GSM04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7.

129 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan, national / 

international unknown.

145 ISDN / telephonynumbering plan,

international number.

161 ISDN / telephony

numbering plan, nationalnumber.

If a ‘+’ is included in the

phone number <number>then a default of 145 isused, in all other cases adefault value of 129 isapplied.

Example: AT*EPRW=4,046194533,2

Page 181: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 181/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 182

Online Reference

OK Set phone number

046194533 and ringtype 2for index 4 in the pesonal

ringtype list.

Test command: *EPRW=?

Returns: (list of supported

<indexr>s)

<nlength> Integer value of maximumlength of field <number>.

(list of supported

<type>s)

(list of supported

<sound type>s)

1 Low ring signal.

2 Medium ring signal.

3 High ring signal.4 Mixed ring signal.

11-20 Melody 1-10 - preset.

31-34 Own melodies 1-4.

Example: AT*EPRW=?

*EPRW: (1-10), 10, (128-255), (1-4,

11-20, 31-34)OK List of index and maximum

length of number and list ofpossible ring types.

Page 182: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 182/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 183

Online Reference

*ECAS Ericsson Callers Allowed Set 

Description: The command is used to set alternatives for call

screening.

Set command: *ECAS= <callscreen>

Options: <callscree

n>

0 No callers allowed.

1 All callers allowed, normalactions shall be taken on

incoming calls.

Default=1

2 Some callers allowed.

Example: AT*ECAS=2

OK

Read command: *ECAS?

Example: AT*ECAS?

*ECAS: 2

OK

Test command: *ECAS=?

Returns: (list of supported<callscreen>s)

Example: AT*ECAS=?

*ECAS: (0-2)

OK

Page 183: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 183/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 184

Online Reference

4.13 Ensemble S18/E : GSM Clock, Date and AlarmHandling

+CCLK Clock  

Description: Sets the real time clock of the ME.

Set command: +CCLK=<time>

Options: <time> String Format is "yy/MM/ dd,hh:mm:ss±zz", wherecharacters indicate year

(two last digits), month,day, hour, minutes,seconds and time zone

(indicates the difference,expressed in quarters of anhour, between the localtime and GMT; range -47...+48).

Example: AT+CCLK= "97/09/29,14:25:00+00"

OK Set correct time to 29th ofSeptember 1997, 14:25:00and no time differencebetween local time andGMT.

Read command: +CCLK?

Example: AT+CCLK?

+CCLK: "97/09/27,22:10:00+00"

OK

Test command: +CCLK=?

Example: AT+CCLK=?

OK

Page 184: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 184/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 185

Online Reference

+CALA Alarm  

Description: Sets an alarm time in the ME. The alarm time is set in

minutes and hours. Date, seconds and time zone are notpossible to use.

Set command: +CALA=<time>

Options: <time> String Format is "hh:mm", wherecharacters indicate hour,minutes.

Example: AT+CALA= "14:25"

OK

Read command: +CALA?

Example: AT+CALA?

+CALA: "22:10"

OK

Test command: +CALA=?

Example: AT+CALA=?

OK

Page 185: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 185/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 186

Online Reference

4.14 Ensemble S19/E : GSM Subscriber Identification

+CIMI Read International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) 

Description: Execution command which causes the TA to return<imsi>. This identifies the individual SIM which isattached to the ME.

Execute command: +CIMI

Returns: <imsi> The IMSI, an integer stringwithout double quotes.

Example: AT+CIMI

931123456

OK

Test command: +CIMI=?

Example: AT+CIMI=?

OK

Page 186: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 186/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 187

Online Reference

4.15 Ensemble C20/C/E : Audio Control

*EALR Audio Line Request 

Description: The AT*EALR command is used by accessories torequest the ATMS and AFMS.

Set command: *EALR=<mode>[,<activation>[,<aud_status>]]

Options<mode>:

0 No request of ATMS nor AFMS

1 Request of ATMS and not AFMS2 Request of AFMS and not ATMS

3 Request of ATMS and AFMS.Default=3

<activation>: 0 Not direct activated audio accessory(e.g. Cordless Portable Hands Free).Default=0

1 Direct activated audio accessory (e.g.Vehicle Hands Free)

<aud_status>: 0 No change of the audio status.Default=0

1 Audio Handover. (Accessory handsover control of both the audio lines andthe call to the phone)

2 Audio Demand. (Accessory demandscontrol of both the audio lines and thecall)

Example: AT*EALR=0,1

*EALR: 0,1

OK

Read command *EALR?

Example: AT*EALR?

Page 187: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 187/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 188

Online Reference

*EARS Analog Ring Signal Request 

Description: This command is used to enable an analog ring signal asindication of an incoming call in an external loudspeaker(AFMS).

*EALR: 3,0,0

OK

Test command: *EALR=?

Example: AT*EALR=?

*EALR: (0-3), (0-1), (0-2)

OK

Set command: *EARS=<mode>

<mode>:: 0 Disable analog ring signal

1 Enable analog ring signal.Default=1

Example: AT*EARS=0

OK

Read command *EARS?

Example: AT*EARS?

*EARS: 1

OK

Test command: *EARS=?

Example: AT*EARS=?

*EARS: (0,1)

OK

Page 188: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 188/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 189

Online Reference

*EMIR Mute Indication Request 

Description: This command is used to request music mute

indications. A music mute indication shall be sent to allaccessories that have requested the indication when acall is set up.

Set command: *EMIR=<mode>

<mode>:: 0 Off, Music Mute Indication resultcodes will not be sent to theaccessory.

1 On, Music Mute Indication resultcodes will be sent to the accessoryDefault=1

Example: AT*EMIR=0

OK

Read command *EMIR?

Example: AT*EMIR?

*EMIR: 1

OK

Test command: *EMIR=?

Example: AT*EMIR=?

*EMIR: (0,1)

OK

Page 189: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 189/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 190

Online Reference

*EAMS Audio Mode Selection 

Description: Used for setting the Audio mode selection. The

command has to be sent to the MS at the initialization ofan audio accessory, but can also be send later to changethe audio mode selection..

Set command: *EAMS=<internal_voice_alg>[,<noise_reduction>[,<side tone>

[,<short_echo_canceling>[,<ATMS_gain>

[,<class>[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>]]]]]]]

Options<internal_voice_alg>:

Sets the voice-processing mode in the phone.

0 None

1 Semi-duplex

2 Full duplex

<noise_reduction>: Sets the noise reduction functionality in thephone.

0 Off. Default=0

1 On

<side tone>: Activates the side tone functionality in the phone.

0 Off. Default=0

1 On

<short_echo_canceling>: Activates the short echo canceling functionalityin the phone.

0 Off. Default=0

1 On

Page 190: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 190/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 191

Online Reference

<ATMS_gain>: Indicates the gain of the signal that is sent to the

phone.

0 Normal (0 dB) (Internal voice process-ing). Default=0

1 12 dB from accessory (External voiceprocessing)

<class>: Indicates the Hands Free class. The classparameter is used to fine adjust some parame-

ters in the internal voice algorithm.

0 None. Default=01 Low end , class reference Vehicle HF

2 Mid End, class reference Vehicle HF

3 High End, class reference Vehicle HF

4 Large room, class reference OfficeHands free

<ATMS_sensitivity_de

viation_from_class>:

Indicates the ATMS sensitivity deviation from a

given class, for example if a HF product has anew microphone that is more sensitive.

0 0 dB. Default=0

1 2,5 dB.

2 -2,5 dB.

3 5,0 dB.

4 -5,0 dB.

Example: AT*EAMS=0,0,0,1,0,0,0,1

OK

Read command *EAMS?

Example: AT*EAMS?

*EAMS: 0,0,0,1,0,0,0,1

OK

Page 191: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 191/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 192

Online Reference

Test command: *EAMS=?

Example: AT*EAMS=?

*EAMS: (0-2), (0-1), (0-1), (0-1),

(0-1), (0-4), (0-4), (0-4)

OK

Page 192: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 192/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 193

Online Reference

*EPHD Portable Hands Free Detection 

Description: Used by Cascade Accessories to indicate to the MS that

the voltage level of CFMS on the downstream side isconstantly low (i.e. a Portable Hands Free is connected).

Set command: *EPHD=<mode>[,<phf_level>[,<button>]]

Options<mode>:

0 No Portable Hands Free attached.

1 Portable Hands Free attached.

Default=1

<phf_level>: 0 Internal Mic gain. Default=0

1 External Mic gain.

<button>: 0 No Button pushed.

1 Button pushed on Portable HandsFree. Default=1

Example: AT*EPHD=0,0,0

OK

Read command *EPHD?

Example: AT*EPHD?

*EPHD: 0,0,0

OK

Test command: *EPHD=?

Example: AT*EPHD=?

*EPHD: (0-1), (0-1), (0-1)

OK

Page 193: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 193/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 194

Online Reference

*ECBP CHF Button Pushed 

Description: This command is used by the Cordless Hands Free

(CHF) to indicate the MS that the button of the CHF hasbeen pushed.

Execute command: *ECBP

Example: AT*ECBP

OK

Test command: *ECBP=?

Example: AT*ECBP=?

OK

Page 194: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 194/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 195

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

*EALV Audio Line Response 

Description: This unsolicited result code is sent to the accessorywhen the phone wants that accessory to change audiostate. Use the AT*EALR command to enable theresponse.

*EMIV Music Mute Indication Response 

Description: This Music Mute indication shall be sent out from thephone every time a parameter change occurs. Use theAT*EMIR command to enable the response.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EALV:<mode>,<activation>,<resp>

Defined values: <mode> See AT*EALR command

<activa-tion>

See AT*EALR command

<resp> 0 Disable ATMS and AFMS

1 Enable ATMS and DisableAFMS

2 Disable ATMS and EnableAFMS

3 Enable ATMS and AFMS

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EMIV:<resp>

Defined values: <resp> 0 Music Mute inactive

1 Music Mute active

Page 195: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 195/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 196

Online Reference

4.16 Ensemble S20/C/E : Ericsson Specific AT Commandsfor GSM

*ECUR Ericsson current report 

Description: Reports the current consumption of the connecteddevice.

Set command: *ECUR=<mamp>

Options: <mamp> Integer Number of milliampsdivided by 10.

Example: AT*ECUR=12 120 milliamps.

OK

Test command: *ECUR=?

Example: AT*ECUR=?

OK

Page 196: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 196/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 197

Online Reference

*EENL Ericsson Environment List 

Description: Used to list all environments known to the phone.

Execute command: *EENL

Returns<accessory_id>:

1 Portable hands free.

2 Vehicle hands free.

3 RS232-cord.

4 IR-device.

5 Reserved.

6 Charger – intelligent.

7 Charger – simple.

8 Reserved.

9 Reserved.

10 Reserved.

11 Reserved.

12 External Handset.

13..255 Reserved.

<unique_id>: 0 Request a new unique identifier fromthe phone.

1-65534 Unique identifier for a unique

accessory.

65535 Default value used by non-uniqueaccessories.

<envname>: String Name of the environment.

Example: AT*EENL

*EENL: 1,65535,Portable HF

*EENL: 2,65535,Vehicle HF*EENL: 6,5519,Desktop Charger

Page 197: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 197/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 198

Online Reference

OK

Test command: *EENL=?

Returns<nenvname>:

Integer Maximum number of environmentsknown to the TE.

Example: AT*EENL=? 14

OK

Page 198: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 198/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 199

Online Reference

*EKSP Ericsson Key Sound Playback 

Description: This command generates a Key Playback from the MS.

The sound is set up by the Key Sound Setting in thephone. The sound properties (tone, quality and duration)should be exactly the same as if a key is pressed on theMS keypad.

Execute command: *EKSP

Example: AT*EKSP

OK

Test command: *EKSP=?

Example: AT*EKSP=?

OK

Page 199: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 199/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 200

Online Reference

*EKSR Ericsson Key Sound Change Report 

Description: Sets and queries the key sound setting of the MS as sent

out over AFMS. The command also is used to turn on/offunsolicited key sound change (*EKSC) via the <report>parameter.

Set command: *EKSR=<report>

Options: <report> 0 Key sound change reportdisabled.Default=0

1 Key sound change reportenabled.

Example: AT*EKSR=1 Enable Key Sound Changereport.

OK

Read command: *EKSR?

Returns: <report><mode> 0 SILENT, no sound when a

key is pressed.

1 CONTINOUS TONE, acontinous tone while a keyis pressed.

2 CLICK, a click when a keyis pressed.

3 QUICK TONE BURST, aquick tone burst while a keyis pressed.

Example: AT*EKSR?

*EKSR: 0,0

OK

Test command: *EKSR=?

Page 200: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 200/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 201

Online Reference

Returns: List of supported <mode>s

List of supported <report>s

Example: AT*EKSR=?

*EKSR: (0-3),(0-1)

OK

Page 201: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 201/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 202

Online Reference

*EMIC Ericsson microphone mode 

Description: Enables or disables the phone microphone. The

microphone should be enabled for each new call even ifit was disabled for the previous call.

Set command: *EMIC=<mode>

Options: <mode> 0 Disable microphone.

1 Enable microphone.

Example: AT*EMIC=0

OK

Read command: *EMIC?

Example: AT*EMIC?

*EMIC: 0

OK

Test command: *EMIC=?

Example: AT*EMIC=?

*EMIC: (0-1)

OK

Page 202: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 202/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 203

Online Reference

*EPEC Ericsson Profile Environment Change 

Description: Used to enable and disable automatic change of profile

when the phone environment is changed..

Set command: *EPEC=<setting>

Options: <setting> 0 Disabled - The phone does

not change profileautomatically when thephone environment ischanged.

Default=01 Enabled - When the

environment changes, thephone automaticallychanges current profile to

the profile associated withthe new environment.

Example: AT*EPEC=1

OK

Read command: *EPEC?

Example: AT*EPEC?

*EPEC: 0

OK

Test command: *EPEC=?

Returns: List of supported <setting>s

Example: AT*EPEC=?

*EPEC: (0-1)

OK

Page 203: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 203/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 204

Online Reference

*EPEE Ericsson pin event 

Description: Requests the MS to report when the pin code has been

inserted and accepted.

Set command: *EPEE=<onoff>

Options: <onoff> 0 Request not activated.

1 Request activated.

Example: AT*EPEE=1

OK

Read command: *EPEE?

Example: AT*EPEE?

*EPEE: 1

OK

Test command: *EPEE=?

Example: AT*EPEE

*EPEE: (0-1)

OK

Unsolicited Resultcode: *EPEV:

Page 204: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 204/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 205

Online Reference

*EPED Ericsson Profile's List Of Environments Delete 

Description: Used to remove an environment from the list of

environments associated to the current profile.

Set command: *EPED=<accessory id>[,<unique_id>]

Options

<accessory_id>:

1 Portable hands free.

2 Vehicle hands free.

3 RS232-cord.

4 IR-device.

5 Reserved.

6 Charger – intelligent.

7 Charger – simple.

8 Reserved.

9 Reserved.d

10 Reserved.

11 Reserved.

12 External Handset.

13..255 Reserved.

<unique_id>: 0 Request a new unique identifier fromthe phone.

1-65534 Unique identifier for a uniqueaccessory.

65535 Default value used by non-uniqueaccessories.

Example: AT*EPED=1,65535

OK

Test command: *EPED=?

Page 205: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 205/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 206

Online Reference

Example: AT*EPED=? (1-14), (1-65535)

OK

Page 206: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 206/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 207

Online Reference

*EPEW Ericsson Profile's List Of Environments Write 

Description: The command is used to add an environment to the list

of environments associated to the active profile. Thecommand may also be used for listing all environmentsassociated to the active profile. Only one profile may beassociated with an environment. However, severalenvironments may be associated with a profile. If tryingto associate an environment already associated withanother profile, this command should produce an error..

Set command: *EPEW=<accessory id>[,<unique_id>]

Options

<accessory_id>:

1 Portable hands free.

2 Vehicle hands free.

3 RS232-cord.

4 IR-device.

5 Reserved.

6 Charger – intelligent.

7 Charger – simple.

8 Reserved.

9 Reserved.

10 Reserved.

11 Reserved.

12 External Handset.

13..255 Reserved.

<unique_id>: 0 Request a new unique identifier fromthe phone.

1-65534 Unique identifier for a uniqueaccessory.

Page 207: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 207/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 208

Online Reference

65535 Default value used by non-unique

accessories.

Example: AT*EPEW=1,65535

OK

Read command: *EPEW?

Returns<accessory_id>

<unique_id>

<envname>: String Name of the environment.Example: AT*EPEW?

*EPEW: 1,65535,Vehicle HF

OK

Test command: *EPEW=?

Returns<nenvname>:

Integer Maximum number of environmentsknown to the TE.

Example: AT*EPEW=? 14

OK

Page 208: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 208/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 209

Online Reference

*EAPS Ericsson Active Profile Set 

Description: There are six (6) profiles predefined in the MS. There is

always one profile active. The profiles are identified byan index from 1 to 6 and by a profile name. The namemay be changed by using the AT*EAPN-command. Thiscommand is used to select the active profile.

The profile consists of the parameters and settingscorresponding to the following commands:

Command Name

AT+CCFC Call Forwarding Number and Conditions

AT*EDIF Divert function and reporting

AT*EDIS Divert set

AT*ELIN Set Line

AT*ERIL Ring Level Set

AT*ECAS Set Callers Allowed

AT*ESBL Setting Back Light Mode

AT*ESCN Set Credit Card Number

AT*ESIL Silence Command

AT+CVIB Vibrator Mode

AT*EPEC Automatic activation

AT*EPEW AT*EPED List of environments

Set command: *EAPS=<index>

Options: <index> 1..6 Number of profile.

Example: AT*EAPS=1

OK

Page 209: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 209/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 210

Online Reference

Read command: *EAPS?

Returns <index>

<tagx> String Name tag for the profile x(e.g. Home, Office,

Meeting, …)

Example: AT*EAPS?

*EAPS: 1,"Office"

OK

Test command: *EAPS=?Returns (list of

supported<index>s)

1..6

<nlength> Integer Integer value of maximumlength of field <nametagx>.

Example: AT*EAPS=? (1,6), 12

OK

Page 210: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 210/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 211

Online Reference

*EAPN Ericsson Active Profile Rename 

Description: This command sets a new name for the active profile.

Set command: *EAPN=<name tag>

Options: <nametag>

String Name tag for the activeprofile (e.g. Home, Office,

Meeting, …)

Example: AT*EAPN="Vacation"

OK

Read command: *EAPN?

Returns <index> 1..6 Number of profile.

<nametag>

String Name tag for the profile x(e.g. Home, Office,Meeting, …)

Example: AT*EAPN?

*EAPS: 1,"Office"*EAPS: 2,"Home"

*EAPS: 3,"Meeting"

*EAPS: 4,"Vacation"

OK

Test command: *EAPN=?

Returns <nlength> Integer Integer value of maximumlength of field <name tag>.

Example: AT*EAPN=? 12

OK

Page 211: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 211/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 212

Online Reference

*ESNU Ericsson settings number 

Description: Sets a number in the MS according to <type>.

Set command: *ESNU=<type>,<number>[,<number type>]

Options: <type> 0 Voice L1.

1 Voice L2.

2 Fax.

3 Data.

<number> 0-9,+ Number.<numbertype>

145 International Diallingincluding “+”.

129 All other numbers.

Example: AT*ESNU=0,"90920465",129

OK

Read command: *ESNU?

Example: AT*ESNU? : 0,0,129

*ESNU: 0,"90920465",129

OK

Test command: *ESNU=?

Example: AT*ESNU=?

*ESNU: (0-3)

OK

Page 212: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 212/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 213

Online Reference

*EBCA Ericsson Battery And Charging Algorithm 

Description: Used to test charging algorithm in the phone and to turn

on/off unsolicited signal result codes.

Set command: *EBCA=<onoff>

Options

<onoff>:

0 Disable.

Default=0

1 Enable.

Returns

<vbatx>:

Integer Battery voltage. Number of mV,

multiplied by 10. I.e. a value of 300 isreported as " 3 V". Range 0 .. 65500

<vbat1>:TXON high and CHARGING on.

<vbat2>:TXON high and CHARGING off.

<vbat3>:TXON low and CHARGING on.

<vbat4>:TXON low and CHARGING off.

<btype>: 0 NiMH

1 Li

2 Unknown battery

<dcio>: Integer DCIO voltage measurement. Battery

voltage. Number of mV, multiplied by10. I.e. a value of 300 is reported as "3 V". Range 0 .. 65500.

<icharge>: Integer Charge current measurement. Currentcharge, Number of ma. I.e. a value of1000 is reported as "1A". Range 0 ..65500.

<iphone>: Integer Phone current consumption, Numberof mA, I.e. a value of 1000 is reportedas "1 A". Range 0 .. 65500.

Page 213: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 213/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 214

Online Reference

<acapacity>: Integer Added capacity during charge,

Number of mAh, multiplied by 20 I.e. avalue of 100 is reported as "2 Ah".

Range 0 .. 65500.

<ccapacity>: Integer Consumed capacity during charge,Number of mAh, multiplied by 20 I.e. avalue of 100 is reported as "2 Ah".Range 0 .. 65500.

<capacity>: Integer Actaul capacity, mAh, Number of mAh,multiplied by 20 I.e. a value of 100 is

reported as "2 Ah". Range 0 .. 65500.<ncapacity>: Integer Nominal capacity, mAh, Number of

mAh, multiplied by 20 I.e. a value of100 is reported as "2 Ah". Range 0 ..

65500.

<tempbattery>: Integer Temperature battery in deg C, -20 degC .. +70 deg C.

<tempphone>: Integer Temperature phone in deg C, -20 deg

C .. +70 deg C.

<bcapacity>: 0 slim.

1 standard.

2 high capacity.

<chargestate>: 0 Start.

1 Safe Charge.

If NiMH: Charge

2 Await

3 Handheld

4 Charge completed Safety timer.

5 Change completed Low Current.If NiMH: Change completed dT/dt.

6 Change Completed.If NiMH: Change Completed d2v/dt2.

Page 214: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 214/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 215

Online Reference

7 Constant Current.

If NiMH: Charge completed: flat V.

8 Constant Voltage.If NiMH: Value not applicable.

Example: AT*EBCA=1

*EBCA:300,300,300,300,0,300,1000,100

0,100,100,100,100,22,21,0,1

OK

Read command: *EBCA?

Example: AT*EBCA?

*EBCA: 1

OK

Test command: *EBCA=?

Response: List of supported parameters

Example: AT*EBCA=?

*EBCA: <vbat1>, <vbat2>,<vbat3>,

<vbat4>, <btype>, <dcio>, <icharge>,

<iphone> <acapacity>, <ccapacity>,

<pacapacity>, <ncapacity>, <tempbat-

tery>, <tempphone>, <bcapacity>,

<chargestate>

OK

Page 215: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 215/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 216

Online Reference

*EQVL Ericsson External Volume Status 

Description: Used to turn on/off unsolicited volume level change

result codes (*EVOLC) via the <report> parameter. Thecommand also queries the status of the volume level ofthe phone.

Set command: *EQVL=<report>

Options<report>:

0 Report disabled.Default=0

1 Report enabled.

Example: AT*EQVL=1

OK

Read command: *EQVL?

Returns<report>:

<current volume>: 0 Low volume

1 .. n-1 Steps in volume

n High volume

Example: AT*EQVL?

*EQVL: 1,4

OK

Test command: *EQVL=?

Response: List of supported <report>s

Example: AT*EQVL=?

*EQVL: (0-1)

OK

Page 216: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 216/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 217

Online Reference

*EXVC Ericsson Set External Volume Control 

Description: Used to set or query whether an external accessory

such as the vehicle handsfree controls the audio volume.

Set command: *EXVC=<external volume>

Options

<external volume>:

0 The phone MMI controls audio volume

over AFMS.Default=0

1 Audio volume over AFMS is output at

maximum level that is no clipping

occurs. An external accessory such asa vehicle kit controls the actual volumelevel heard by the user.

Example: AT*EXVC=0

OK

Read command: *EXVC?

Example: AT*EXVC?*EXVC: 1

OK

Test command: *EXVC=?

Response: List of supported <external volume>s

Example: AT*EXVC=?

*EXVC: (0-1)

OK

Page 217: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 217/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 218

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

*EBCA Ericsson Indication Algorithm Status 

Description: This unsolicited result code indicates the changes instatus of parameters of charging algorithm. Thisunsolicited status is enabled with the AT*EBCAcommand.

*EPEV Ericsson Pin Code event 

Description: Reports that the user has entered the PIN Code and ithas been accepted. ME is not pending for any password

*EVOLC Ericsson Volume Change Report 

Description: This unsolicited result code is enabled by AT*EQVL toindicate changes in the volume control made by the

user.

Unsolicited Resultcode: *EBCA:

Unsolicited Resultcode: *EPEV: Unsolicited status is

enabled with AT*EPEE

command.

Unsolicited Resultcode: *EVOLC: <current volume>

Defined values: <currentvolume>

0 Low Volume

1.. n-1 Steps in volume

7 High volume

Page 218: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 218/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 219

Online Reference

*EKSC Ericsson Key Sound Change Report 

Description: Indicates changes in the key sound setting made by the

user. This result code is also sent by the phone uponsuccessful execution of AT*EKSR=1.

Unsolicited Resultcode: *EKSC: <mode>

Defined values: <mode> 0 SILENT, no sound when akey is pressed

1 CONTINOUS TONE, a

continous tone while a keyis pressed

2 CLICK, a click when a keyis pressed

3 QUICK TONE BURST, aquick tone burst while a keyis pressed

Page 219: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 219/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 220

Online Reference

4.17 Ensemble C21/C/E : Accessory Menus

*EAM Ericsson Add Accessory Menu Item 

Description: Used to add the persistent menu item to the phone menustructure. A new menu item overwrites any existingmenu item for the accessory. If the accessorydisconnects, the menu item is deleted.

Set command: *EAM=<persistent menu item text>

This creates the additional menu if it is not already

present, and then adds an item with the textspecified in <persistent menu item text>.

Example: AT*EAM=<start>

OK

Test command: *EAM=?

Example: AT*EAM=?

OK

Page 220: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 220/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 221

Online Reference

*EAST Ericsson Accessory Status Text 

Description: An accessory can request that the phone display a text

string on the standby screen. This text may for examplebe shown beside the operator name or it may replace thetime. The request may be denied, for example if thephone is not capable of displaying the text. Anotherrequest will overwrite the previous text.

Set command: *EAST=<area>,<status text>

Options: <area> 0 Very important status text.

1 More important than timeinformation.

2 Display if you can.

<status text> String of text.

Example: AT*EAST=0,"World"

OK

Test command: *EAST=?

Example: AT*EAST=?

OK

Page 221: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 221/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 222

Online Reference

*EASM Ericsson Accessory Sub Menu 

Description: Used to add a submenu to a menu item. If the accessory

is disconnected all corresponding accessory submenusitems are deleted.

Set command: *EASM=<title>,<next state>,<selecteditem>,<number of menu items>[,<menuitem>[,<menu item>,..]]

Options<title>:

String The menu title.

<next state>: Specifies what happens when the user Accepts(Yes/Send) or Rejects (No/End) the input dialogor submenu.

0 Accept: Go to persistent.

Reject: Go to persistent.

1 Accept: Wait.

Reject: Go to persistent.

2 Accept: Wait.

Reject: Wait.

3 Accept: Go to persistent.

Reject: Wait.

4 Accept: Go to standby.

Reject: Go to persistent.5 Accept: Go to standby.

Reject: Wait.

6 Accept: Go to standby.

Reject: Go to standby.

7 Accept: Go to persistent.

Reject: Go to standby.

Page 222: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 222/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 223

Online Reference

8 Accept: Wait.

Reject: Go to standby.

<selected item>: integer 1.. Index of the selected item starting at 1

<number of menuitems>:

Integer 1.. Number of menu items

<menu item>: String Text for menu items in the accessorymenu

Example: AT*EASM=size,0,1,2,big,small

OK

Test command: *EASM=?

Example: AT*EASM=?

*EASM: (0-8), (0-12)

OK

Page 223: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 223/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 224

Online Reference

*EAID Ericsson Accessory Input Dialog 

Description: Used to request the phone to add an input dialog. The

dialog is dynamic. A request can be denied, for exampleif the phone is already displaying a dialog box on thestandby screen.

Set command: *EAID=<type>, <next state>, <title>, [, <para1>[, <para 2>[, <para 3> ]]]

Options<type>:

Type of input. Command syntax.

0 No dialog 0

1 Messagebox.

*EAID=1, <next state>,<title>,<messagetext>[,<timeout>]

2 Yes-NoInput.

*EAID=2, <next state>,<title>,<questiontext>[,<timeout>]

3 On-OffInput

*EAID=3,<nextstate>,<title>,<default on/ off>

4 PercentInput

*EAID=4,<nextstate>,<title>,<percentsteps>, <default percentstep>

5 1-of-many

selection

*EAID=5, <next state>,

<title>, <default selected>,<number of list items>

[,<list item> [,<list item>[,…]]]

6 Real Input *EAID=6,<next

state>,<title>,<prompt>,<max real value> [,<defaultreal value>]

Page 224: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 224/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 225

Online Reference

7 Integer

Input

*EAID=7,<next

state>,<title>,<prompt>,<min value>, <max value>

[,<default value>]

8 PhonenumberInput

*EAID=8,<nextstate>,<title>,<prompt>[,<default number>]

9 Date Input*EAID=9,<nextstate>,<title> [,<defaultdate>]

10 Time Input*EAID=10,<nextstate>,<title> [,<time>]

11 StringInput

*EAID=11,<nextstate>,<title>,<prompt>,<max length> [,<default text>]

12 NumericAuthentication Input

*EAID=12,<next state>,<title>, <prompt>, <maxlength>

13 TimedFeedback

*EAID=13,<next state>,<title>

14 Information

*EAID=14,<nextstate>,<title>,<text>

<title>: String The header for the input, or thequestion.

<prompt>: String Text before the input.<next state>: (please refer to description under command

*EASM)

<message text>: String Text in the message box.

<timeout>: Integer 0-100

Timeout in tens of seconds, 0-100s,until the information dialogdisappears. If no timeout is given the

dialog stays up until the userinteraction.

Page 225: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 225/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 226

Online Reference

<question text>: String Text for the question.

<default selected>: Integer Default selected, 0 if no default

selected.<number of list items>: Integer Number of items in the list.

<list item>:String Item in a list.

<default on/off>: 0=off,1=on

Default selected in an on-off dialog.

<default text>: String Text to edit.

<max real value>: String Maximum real value allowed to enter.

<default real value>: String Default real value to be changed.

<min value>: Integer Minimum value accepted.

<max value>: Integer Maximum value accepted.

<default value>: Integer Integer to edit.

<default text>: String Text to edit.

<default number>: String Phone number to edit.

<percent steps>: 1..10 Number of steps in the input dialog.

<default percent

steps>:

0..10 Default percent step selected, if

<percent step>=5 and <defaultpercent step>=1, then 20% is defaultselected.

<default date>: String “yy/MM/dd”.<default time>: String “hh:mm”.

<text>: String Information text

Example: AT*EAID=1,0,Info,Hello world

OK

Test command: *EAID=?

Example: AT*EAID=?

Page 226: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 226/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 227

Online Reference

OK

Page 227: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 227/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 228

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

*EAAI Ericsson Accessory Additional Indication 

Description: The unsolicited result code is sent to the accessorywhen the user selects the persistent menu item from theadditional menu related to the accessory. See also theAT*EAM command.

*EAMI Ericsson Accessory Menu Indication 

Description: This unsolicited result code is sent when the userselects an alternative in the accessory menu. The indexof the selected menu item is returned. The index is one

based (the first item has index 1). If the user rejects thesubmenu *EAMI:0 is sent to the accessory. See also theAT*EASM command.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EAAI

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EAAI:<menu item index>

Defined values: <menuitemindex>

Index of selected menu item. Firstmenu item has index 1. 0 means thatthe user rejected the submenu.

Integer 0=rejected submenu1.. index of menu item

Page 228: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 228/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 229

Online Reference

*EAII Ericsson Accessory Input Dialog Indication 

Description: This unsolicited result code is sent by the phone when

the user has accepted (pressed Yes) a dynamic inputdialog. It may also be sent if the user rejected the dialog(pressed No), depending on the <next state> parameter.See also the AT*EAID command.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EAII[: <type>, <input1>, …]

(If CLR or NO was pressed,no string is appended to

this unsolicited result code)

<type> Dialog type. Unsolicited Result CodeSyntax.

Aborted *EAII

Rejected *EAII:0

1 Messagebox

*EAII:1,1

2 Yes-No *EAII:2, <yes-no>

3 On-Off *EAII:3, <on-off>

4 Percent *EAII:4, <percent>

5 1-of-manyselection

*EAII:5, <selected>

6 Real *EAII:6, <real value>

7 Integer *EAII:7, <value>

8 Phonenumber

*EAII:8, <phone number>

9 Date *EAII:9, <date>

10 Time *EAII:10, <time>

11 String *EAII:11, <text>

12 Authentica

tion (0..9)

*EAII:12, <text>

Page 229: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 229/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 230

Online Reference

13 Timed

Feedback

*EAII:13,1

14 Information

*EAII:14,1

Defined values: <yes-no> 0=no,1=yes

<on-off> 0=off,1=on

<percent> 0..100

<selected>Integer Selected alternative in list.

<text> String Text entered by user.

<real

value>

String

<value> Integer

<phonenumber>

Phonenumber

<date> “yy/MM/dd”

<time> “hh:mm”

Page 230: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 230/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 231

Online Reference

4.18 Ensemble C22/C/E : Accessory Authentication

+CSCC Secure Control Command 

Description: Used for authentication of accessories.

Set command: +CSCC=<mode>,<cmd_set>[,<token>]

Defined values:<mode>

1 Request challenge token to enableaccess to specified command set(<token> not used).

2 Enable access to specified commandset (<token> required).

3 Disable access to specified commandset (<token> not used).

<cmd_set> 0..127 Reserved by ETSI

128..198 Reserved for future use.

199 Command set for Ericsson

Accessories for 3 volt platform T28.

200..255 Reserved for future use.

<token> 1 byte IRA String

“0110 1100” repre-sented by the IRAstring “6C”

1 Byte token from theauthentication algorithm

Returns:

<challenge>

1 byte IRA String

“0110 1100”represented by theIRA string “6C”

1 Byte to be converted to a

token by the authenticationalgorithm

Example: AT+CSCC=2,199,01101100

+CSCC:11001100

OK

Read command: +CSCC?

Example: AT+CSCC?

Page 231: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 231/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 232

Online Reference

CSCC: 2,199

OK

Test command: +CSCC=?

Example: AT+CSCC=?

CSCC: (1-2),(199)

OK

Page 232: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 232/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 233

Online Reference

4.19 Ensemble C24/C/E : Voice Call Control

*EVA Answer Incoming Call Command 

Description: Voice call: Signals the MS to answer an incoming call.

*EVD Voice Dial Command 

Description: Instructs the MS to originate (dial) a voice call. Allcharacters are considered part of the call addressinginformation, up to a semicolon character or the end ofthe command line.

*EVH Voice Hook Command 

Description: Signals the MS to terminate an active voice call.

Execute command: *EVA

Example: AT*EVA

OK

Execute command: *EVD=[<dial_string>]

Defined values<dial_string>:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * #+

Valid characters fororigination

Example: AT*EVD="+4646371700"

OK

Execute command: *EVH

Example: AT*EVH

OK

Page 233: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 233/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 234

Online Reference

4.20 Ensemble C25/E : ETSI 07.10 Multiplex Protocol

+CMUX Activate Multiplex Protocol 

Description: The command is used for turning on the multiplexer.

Set command: +CMUX=<transparency>[,<subset>[,<portspeed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]]

Defined values<transparency>:

0 No transparency.

<subset>: 0 Only UIH frames used.<port speed>: 0 9600 bit/s.

<N1>: 31 Default maximum frame size.

<T1>: 10 100ms default timer.

<N2>: 3 Default maximum number of re-transmissions.

<T2>: 30 300ms default timer.

<T3>: 10 10s default timer.

Example: AT+CMUX=0 Enable 07.10. @57600 bps

OK Switch to new baud rateand 07.10

Read command: +CMUX?

Example: AT+CMUX?

+CMUX: 0,0,0,31,10,3,30,10

OK

Test command: +CMUX=?

Example: AT+CMUX=?

+CMUX: (0),(0),(0),(31),

(10),(3),(30),(10)

OK

Page 234: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 234/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 235

Online Reference

4.21 Ensemble C26/C/E : Accessory Identification

*EACS Ericsson Acccessory Status 

Description: Identifies an accessory, reports accessory status andrequests a unique identifier.

Set command: *EACS=<accessory id>,<status value>[,<uniqueid>]

Defined values<accessory_id>:

1 Portable hands free. Presented in TEas: PORTABLE_HF_TXT

2 Vehicle hands free. Presented in TEas: VEHICLE_HF_TXT

3 RS232-cord. Presented in TE as:DATA_CABLE_TXT

4 IR-device. Presented in TE as:INFRARED_MODEM_TXT

5 Reserved for Vibrator. Not supported

6 Charger – intelligent. Presented in TEas:DESKTOP_CHARGER_TXT+<nr>

7 Charger – simple. Presented in TE as:TRAVEL_CHARGER_TXT

8 Reserved for MC-Link. Not supported

9 Reserved for FM Radio. Not

supported10 Reserved for Cordless headset. Not

supported

11 Reserved for PC card. Not supported

12 External Handset. Presented in TE as:

EXTERNAL_HANDSET_TXT

Page 235: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 235/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 236

Online Reference

13..255 Reserved for future accessories.

Presented in TE as:ACCESSORY_TYPE_TXT+<accesso

ry id>

<status value>: 0 Device is not working.

1 Device is connected and working.

2 Device is connected and working andis searching for other IrDA-devices.

(Only Infrared, accessory id 4)

3 Device is connected and working andhas found another IrDA-device in

range. (Only Infrared, accessory id 4)Not supported.

4 Device is connected and working andis engaged in an IrDA connection.(Only Infrared, accessory id 4)

5 Device is connected and working and

is engaged in an IrDA connection, butthe IrDA beam is obstructed.(Only Infrared, accessory id 4)

Returns<unique id>:

0 Request a new unique identifier fromthe phone.

1-65534 Unique identifier for a uniqueaccessory.

65535 Default value used by non-uniqueaccessories.

Example: AT*EACS=1,1,1

*EACS: 1

OK

Read command: *EACS?

Example: AT*EACS?

*EACS: 1,1,1

Page 236: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 236/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 237

Online Reference

*EACS: 2,1,2

OK

Test command: *EACS=?

Example: AT*EACS=?

*EACS: (1-2)

OK

Page 237: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 237/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 238

Online Reference

4.22 Ensemble C30/C/E : VAD Support for Vehicle HF 3V

*EYRR Recording Result 

Description: Sent from the external VAD to the MS. VAD returns theresult of the recording.

Set command: *EYRR=<result>[,<storage>,<index>]

Defined values<result>:

0 Matched Name or Training Good.Response for *EYRE, *EYTN.

1 No Match Detected, or no worddetected. Response for *EYRE,*EYTN.

2 To Loud. Response for *EYRE,*EYTN

3 To Silent/Quiet. Response for *EYRE,*EYTN

4 No User Input Detected. Response for*EYRE, *EYTN

5 Two Names Detected as Close.

Response for *EYRE

6 Name close to,. Response for *EYTN

<storage>: String “SM” SIM

“ME” Mobile

“MT” (SIM+Mobile) Notsupported (AccessoryVehicle HF must supportthis value)

“RC” ME received calls Notsupported (AccessoryVehicle HF must supportthis value)

Page 238: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 238/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 239

Online Reference

“DC” ME dialled calls Not

supported (AccessoryVehicle HF must support

this value)

“MC” ME missed calls Notsupported (AccessoryVehicle HF must supportthis value)

“EN” SIM or ME emergencynumber Not supported

(Accessory Vehicle HFmust support this value)

“ON” SIM or ME own numbersNot supported (Accessory

Vehicle HF must supportthis value)

“FD” SIM fixdialling-phonebook

Not supported (Accessory

Vehicle HF must supportthis value)

“LD” SIM last-dialling-phonebook Not supported(Accessory Vehicle HFmust support this value)

“TA” TA phonebook Notsupported

“HP” Hierarchical phonebook(Ericsson specific) Notsupported (AccessoryVehicle HF must support

this value)

<index>: Integer 0..255 Depending on SIM capacityand ME capacity

Example: AT*EYRR=0,67 VAD recording matchesindex 67OK

Page 239: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 239/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 240

Online Reference

*EYRE Recognised Entry 

Description: Sent from the external VAD to the MS. Tells MS thatindex <index> in phonebook is recognised (notrecognised) by external VAD.

OK

Set command: *EYRE=<storage>,<index>, <recognised>,<records left>

Defined values

<storage>:

See values under command *EYRR

<index>: See values under command *EYRR

<recognised>: Integer 0 Phonebook unrecognised.Response for *EYSR,

*EYDE.

1 Phonebook recognised.

Response for *EYSR,

*EYDE.

<records left> Integer Number of free record places left.

Response for *EYSR

Example: AT*EYRE="SM",20

,1,30

Index 20 in SIM is

recognised. VAD has 3record places free.

OK

Page 240: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 240/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 241

Online Reference

*EYDO Done  

Description: Sent from the external VAD to the MS. VAD is done with

playback.

*EYRV Registered VAD 

Description: Sent from the external VAD to the MS. External VAD isavailable.

Execute command: *EYDO Response for*EYPE,*EYPP,*EYPT

Example: AT*EYDO VAD is done with playback.

OK

Set command: *EYRV=<VAD status>,<total records>,<recordsleft>

Defined values<VAD status>:

Integer 0 Phone is recognised

1 Phone is not recognised,free entry for new phone.

2 Phone is not recognised,no free entry for newphone.

<total records> Integer Number of total record places(free+used).

<records left> Integer Number of free record places left.

Example: AT*EYRV=0,10,10 Phone is recognised, 10free record places that canbe trained. Totally 10record places.

OK

Page 241: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 241/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 242

Online Reference

*EYPI Phone Info  

Description: Sent from the external VAD to the MS. External VAD is

available.

Set command: *EYRV=<max>, <used>[, <entry>, <SIM>,<IMEI>, <Phone number>]

Defined values<max>:

Integer Maximum number of different phonessupported

<used> Integer How many are used

<entry> Integer The number for this entry<SIM> String ISMI for entry

<IMEI> String IMEI for entry

<Phone number> String Subscriber phone number

Example: AT*EYPI=2,2,1,"97439587349857",

"94358998456", "+4646193370"

OK

Page 242: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 242/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 243

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

*EYPE Play Entry  

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. Playphonebook entry.

*EYPP Play Prompt 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. Play

prompt.

*EYRE Recognise 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. VAD startsrecognising.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYPE:<storage>,<index>

Defined values<storage>:

See values under command *EYRR

<index>: See values under command *EYRR

Unsolicited Result

code:

*EYPP:<prompt>

Defined values<prompt>:

Integer 0 WarningBeep_sd

1 VoiceMissBeep_sd

2 StartVoiceRecording_sd

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYRE

Page 243: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 243/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 244

Online Reference

*EYTN Train Name  

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. VAD starts

recording.

*EYPT Play Training Recording 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. VAD startsplayback of recording.

*EYDE Delete Entry 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. VAD

deletes the entry from its list.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYTN

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYPT

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYDE:<storage>,<index>

Defined values

<storage>:

See values under command *EYRR

<index>: See values under command *EYRR

Page 244: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 244/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 245

Online Reference

*EYSR Save Recording 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. VAD saves

the recording.

*EYAB Abort  

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. Abortsplayback/recording.

*EYGP Get Phones 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. VADshould supply phone with information about phone entry<entry>. See also command AT*EYPI.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYSR:<storage>,<index>

Defined values<storage>:

See values under command *EYRR

<index>: See values under command *EYRR

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYAB

Unsolicited Result

code:

*EYGP:<entry>

Defined values<entry>:

Integer The number for this entry.

Page 245: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 245/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 246

Online Reference

*EYDP Delete Phone 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. VAD

should delete a phone from VAD.

*EYRP Register Phone 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. User hasselected external handsfree, please register phone.

*EYSS Start Synchronise 

Description: This is sent from the MS to the external VAD. Starts thesynchronisation.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYDP:<entry>

Defined values<entry>:

Integer The number for this entry.

Unsolicited Resultcode:

*EYRP

Unsolicited Result

code:

*EYSS

Page 246: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 246/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 247

Online Reference

4.23 Ensemble C31/C/E : Quick Menu

*ECMW Ericsson Customized Menu Write 

Description: Puts a menu item given by <index> from the menu listinto the Customized menu in the position given by<pos>. The item on this position and items below thisposition are shifted down one step. If the parameter<pos> is not given then the item will be placed at the first

empty place in the Customized menu list.

Set command: *ECMW=[<pos>],<index>Defined values

<pos>:

Integer The position in the Customized Menu.

<index>: Integer Gives the position of a menu item inthe menu list

Example: AT*ECMW=1,1

OK

Delete command: *ECMW=<pos> Deletes item on position.

Example: AT*ECMW=1

OK

Read command: *ECMW?

Example: AT*ECMW?

*ECMW: 1,1

*ECMW: 2,3

OK

Test command: *ECMW=?

Example: AT*ECMW=?

*ECMW: (1-4)

OK

Page 247: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 247/351

AT Commands Phone Terminal Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 248

Online Reference

*EMLR Ericsson Menu List Read 

Description: Lists the menu items that are possible to add to the

Customized Menu. The index and the name of the menuitems are listed. The name is given in the language of thecurrent setting.

Execute command: *EMLR

Returns: *EMLR:<index1>,<name1>[<CR><LF>*EMLR:<index2>,<name2>[…]]

Defined values

<index>:

Integer Gives the position of a menu item in

the menu list.

<name>: String The name of the menu item.

Example: AT*EMLR

*EMLR: 1,open

*EMLR: 3,close

OK

Test command: *EMLR=?

Example: AT*EMLR=?

OK

Page 248: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 248/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 249

Online Reference

5AT Commands Modem TerminatedNote: These commands require IR modem.

5.1 Ensemble S1/B/E : GSM DTE-DCE Interface commands

+CSCS Select terminal character set 

Description: Defines the character set to be used.

Set command: +CSCS=[<chset>]

Options: <chset> “GSM” Default GSM alphabet.

Example: AT+CSCS="GSM"

OK

Read command: +CSCS? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CSCS?

+CSCS: "GSM"

OK

Test command: +CSCS=?

Example: AT+CSCS=?

+CSCS: "GSM","IRA","88591","ERICSSON"

OK

Page 249: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 249/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 250

Online Reference

5.2 Ensemble C2/B : Identification and Control

AT Attention Command  

Description: Determines the presence of a MS.

Z Reset to user defined configuration 

Description: Perform a ‘soft reset’, i.e. terminate any ongoingoperation and connection and restore one of the

configurations stored in nonvolatile memory as theactive profile.

Execute command: AT

Example: AT

OK

Set command: Z=[<profile>]

Options: <profile>

0 Select the user profile to

restore.

Example 1: ATZ

OK

Test command: Z=?

Example: ATZ=?

Z: (0)

OK

Page 250: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 250/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 251

Online Reference

&F Set to factory configuration 

Description: Resets the settings to the predefined factory

configurations. Configurations which would adverselyeffect an open connection or a current data transmissionare not loaded until the connection ceases.

Command: &F=[<pr>] or &F[<pr>]

Options: <pr> 0 Reset all the settings to thefactory defaults.

Example: AT&F

OK

Test command: &F=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT&F=?

&F: (0)

OK

Page 251: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 251/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 252

Online Reference

I Identification information  

Description: Returns information text and final result code. Provides

compatibility with Windows 95.

Execute command: I[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 As +GMM.

1 As +GMR.

5 Userprofile 1 and 2.

Default = 0.

Example: ATI0

Ericsson DI 28

OK

Page 252: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 252/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 253

Online Reference

+GMI Request Infrared Modem manufacturer identification 

Description: Returns the manufacturer identification for the Infrared

Modem.

+GMM Request Infrared Modem model identification 

Description: Returns the model identification of the Infrared Modem.

Execute command: +GMI

Example: AT+GMI

Ericsson

OK

Test command: +GMI=?

Example: AT+GMI=?

OK

Execute command: +GMM

Example: AT+GMM

<TAE Model Identification>

OK

Test command: +GMM=?

Example: AT+GMM=?

OK

Page 253: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 253/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 254

Online Reference

+GMR Request Infrared Modem revision identification 

Description: Returns the revision identification of the Infrared

Modem.

Execute command: +GMR

Example: AT+GMR

9807021414

OK

Test command: +GMR=?

Example: AT+GMR=?

OK

Page 254: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 254/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 255

Online Reference

+GCAP Request Infrared Modem capabilities list 

Description: Returns a list of valid Infrared Modem command

prefixes.

Execute command: +GCAP

Returns: +FCLASS Fax class 1 and 2

commands.

+CGSM GSM commands.

Example: AT+GCAP

+GCAP: +FCLASS,+CGSM

OK

Test command: +GCAP=?

Example: AT+GCAP=?

OK

Page 255: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 255/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 256

Online Reference

5.3 Ensemble S2/B : GSM Call Control

+CR Service reporting control 

Description: Enables or disables display of intermediate bearercapability reports during the handshake phase.

Set command: +CR=[<mode>]

Options: <mode> 0 Disable reporting.

1 Enable reporting.

Default = 0.

Example 1: AT+CR=1 Enable service reporting.

OK

Example 2: AT+CR=0 Disable service reporting.

OK

Read command: +CR? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CR?

+CR: 0

OK

Test command: +CR=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: AT+CR=?

+CR: (0,1)

OK

UnsolicitedResult code: +CR ASYNC Asynchronous transparent

call connection indicated.

Page 256: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 256/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 257

Online Reference

+CRC Cellular result codes 

Description: Enables or disables extended format of incoming call

identification.

Set command: +CRC=[<mode>]

Options: <mode> 0 Disable extended format.

1 Enable extended format.

Default = 0.

Example 1: AT+CR=1 Enable CRC.

OK

Example 2: AT+CRC=0 Disable CRC.

OK

Read command: +CRC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CR?

+CR: 0

OK

Test command: +CRC=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: AT+CR=?

+CR: (0,1)

OK

UnsolicitedResult code: +CRING: <type>

Page 257: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 257/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 258

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

*CRING Cellular result code 

Description Set command controls whether or not the extendedformat of incoming call indication is used.

Unsolicited Resultcode: *CRING:<type> When enabled,indicates

the incoming call to the TEinstead of the normal

RING.Defined values: <type> ASYNC Asynchronous transparent.

SYNC Synchronous transparent.

RELASYNC

Asynchronous non-transparent.

RELSYNC

Synchronous non-transparent.

FAX/ Facsimile.

VOICE Normal voice (TS 11).

Page 258: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 258/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 259

Online Reference

5.4 Ensemble C3/B : Call Control

A Answer  

Description: Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call.

H Hook control  

Description: Terminates a connection.

Execute command: A

Example: ATA

CONNECT 9600

Execute command: H[<n>]

Example: ATH

OK

Option: <n> 0 Disconnect dataconnection.

Page 259: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 259/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 260

Online Reference

D Dial  

Description: Initiate a phone voice connection (phone number

terminated by semicolon). The phone number used toestablish the connection will consist of digits andmodifiers or a stored number specification.

Execute command: D Dial the phone numberentered on the phone display.

Other options: D<n> Dial the phone numberspecified in the command as

<n>.D=ME<i> Dial the phone number

stored in the mobile phonewhich is located by theindex <i>.

D=SIM<i> Dial the phone numberstored in the SIM card which

is located by the index <i>.

DL Redial the last phonenumber dialled.

Modifiers: W The W modifier is ignoredbut is included only for

compatibility purposes.

, The comma modifier isignored but is included only

for compatibility purposes.; Informs the Infrared Modem

that the number is a voicerather than a fax or datanumber.

T The T modifier is ignoredbut is included only forcompatibility purposes.

Page 260: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 260/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 261

Online Reference

P The P modifier is ignored

but is included only forcompatibility purposes.

Dial examples: ATD0705862975

<response> See below for possibleresponses.

ATD=ME7 Dial the number stored inindex 7 of the mobile

phone.<response>

ATD=SIM5Dial the number stored inindex 5 of the SIM card.

<response>

ATD046193000; Voice dial, immediatelyreturns OK.

ATDL Redial the last numberdialled.

Responses: CONNECT <speed> Data or fax connection

established at the rategiven in <speed>.

NO CARRIER Unable to establish aconnection or theconnection attempt wasaborted by the user.

ERROR An unexpected erroroccurred while trying to

establish the connection.

NO DIALTONE The mobile phone is beingused for a voice call or is notwithin coverage of the

network.

BUSY The phone number called isengaged, only valid for data

and fax connections.

Page 261: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 261/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 262

Online Reference

O Return to on-line data mode  

Description: Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line

command mode during an active call. Returns ERRORwhen not in on-line command mode.

P Select pulse dialling  

Description: Implemented for compatibility only. Would normallycause the next D command to use pulses/tones whendialling the number.

T Select tone dialling  

Description: Implemented for compatibility only. Would normallycause the next D command to use pulses/tones whendialling the number.

Execute command: O

Examples: ATO

CONNECT 9600

Set command: P

Example: ATP

OK

Test command: P=?

Example: ATP=?

OK

Set command: T

Example: ATT

OK

Page 262: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 262/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 263

Online Reference

Test command: T=?

Example: ATT=?

OK

Page 263: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 263/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 264

Online Reference

5.5 Ensemble S3/B : GSM Data/Fax

+CRLP Radio link protocol 

Description: Define the Radio Link Protocol parameters.

Set command: +CRLP=[<iws>,[<mws>,[<T1>,[<N2>]]]]

Options: <iws> 0 - 61 IWF to MS window size.

Default = 61.

<mws> 0 - 61 MS to IWF window size.

Default = 61.

<T1> 38 - 255 Acknowledgement timer inunits of 10ms.

Default = 48.

<N2> 0 - 255 Retransmission attempts.

Default = 6.

Example: AT+CRLP=61,61,48,6

OK

Read command: +CRLP? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CRLP?

+CRLP: 61,61,48,6

OK

Test command: +CRLP=? Always returns (0,61),(0,61),(38-255),(0-255).

Example: AT+CRLP=?

+CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(38-255),(0-255)

OK

Page 264: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 264/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 265

Online Reference

+CBST Select bearer service type 

Description: Define the type of bearer service (name), data rate

(speed) and connection element (ce) used wheninitiating a call.

To configure the Infrared Modem to operate with anISDN connection, the speed value must be 68 or greater.

Set command: +CBST=[<speed>,[<name>,[<ce>]]]

Options: <speed> 0 Auto selection of baud

setting.4 2400bps V22bis.

6 4800bps V32.

7 9600bps V32.

68 2400bps V.110 (ISDN).

70 4800bps V.110 (ISDN).

71 9600bps V.110 (ISDN).

Default = 0.

<name> 0 Asynchronous connection.

<ce> 1 Non transparent.

Example: AT+CBST=0,0,1

OK

Read command: +CBST? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CBST?

+CBST: 0,0,1

OK

Page 265: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 265/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 266

Online Reference

Test Command: +CBST=? Always returns (0,4,6,7,

68,70,71),(0),(1).

Example: AT+CBST=?

+CBST: (0,4,6,7,68,70,71),(0),(1)

OK

Page 266: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 266/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 267

Online Reference

5.6 Ensemble C4/B : Interface Commands

S2 Escape sequence character 

Description: Defines the character to be used as the escapesequence character when switching from on-line datamode to on-line command mode. The response to thecommand is modified to reflect the change.

Set command: S2=[<esc>]

Options: <esc> 43 The ASCII value of the

escape sequencecharacter.

0-255 Escape sequencecharacter.

Default = 43.

Example: ATS2=43

OK

Read command: S2? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS2?

043

OK

Test command: S2=?

Example: ATS2=?

S2: (0-255)

OK

Page 267: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 267/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 268

Online Reference

S3 Command line termination character 

Description: Defines the character to be used as the line termination

character. This is used both for the detection of an endof command and in formatting of responses. Theresponse to the command is modified to reflect thechange.

Set command: S3=[<value>]

Options: <value> 13 The default ASCII value ofthe Command Line

termination character.0-127 Command Line termination

character.

Default = 13.

Example: ATS3=13

OK

Read command: S3? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS3?

013

OK

Test command: S3=? Always returns (0-127).

Example: ATS3=?

S3: (0-127)

OK

Page 268: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 268/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 269

Online Reference

S4 Response formatting character 

Description: Defines the character to be used as the line formatting

character. The response to the command is modified toreflect the change.

Set command: S4=[<value>]

Options: <value> 10 The default ASCII value offormatting character.

0-127 Formatting character.

Default = 10.Example: ATS4=10

OK

Read command: S4? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS4?

010

OK

Test command: S4=? Always returns (0-127).

Example: ATS4=?

S4: (0-127)

OK

Page 269: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 269/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 270

Online Reference

S5 Command line editing character 

Description: Defines the character to use as command line editing

character.

Set command: S5=[<value>]

Options: <value> 8 The default ASCII value of

the Line Editing Character.

0-127 Line editing character.

Default = 8.

Example: ATS5=8

OK

Read command: S5? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS5?

008

OK

Test command: S5=? Always returns (0-127).

Example: ATS5=?

S5: (0-127)

OK

Page 270: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 270/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 271

Online Reference

E Command echo  

Description: Enables or disables the command line echo.

Set command: E=[<value>] or E[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 No echo of command modecharacters.

1 Echo command modecharacters.

Default = 1.

Example: ATE=1

OK

Read command: E? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATE?

E: 1

OK

Test command: E=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: ATE=?

E: (0,1)

OK

Page 271: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 271/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 272

Online Reference

Q Result code suppression  

Description: Enables or disables the display of result codes. When

the result code is disabled, the Infrared Modem does notissue any final result codes but continues to providenormal text in response to commands.

Set command: Q=[<value>] or Q[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Enable result codes.

1 Disable result codes.

Default = 0.Example: ATQ=1

OK

Read command: Q? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATQ?

Q: 1

OK

Test command: Q=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: ATQ=?

Q: (0,1)

OK

Page 272: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 272/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 273

Online Reference

V Result code format  

Description: Select either verbose or numeric response codes.

Set command: V=[<value>] or V[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Display numeric resultcodes.

1 Display verbose resultcodes.

Default = 1.

Example: ATV=1

OK

Read command: V? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATV?

V: 1

OK

Test command: V=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: ATV=?

V: (0,1)

OK

Page 273: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 273/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 274

Online Reference

&C Circuit 109 (DCD) control  

Description: Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect.

&D Circuit 108 (DTR) response 

Description: Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready fromDTE.

Set command: &C[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 DCD always on.

1 DCD follows theconnection.

Default = 1.

Example: AT&C1

OK

Set command: &D[<value>]

Options: <value> for DTR On to Offtransitions:

0 Ignore. Default value.

1 When in on-line data modethen switch to on-line

command mode. All otherstates, as for n = 2.

2 Disconnect and switch tooff-line command mode.

Example: AT&D2

OK

Page 274: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 274/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 275

Online Reference

+IFC DTE-DCE local flow control 

Description: Defines the flow control between the Infrared Modem

and the computer when in on-line data mode. No flowcontrol is enabled in any of the command modes.

Set command: +IFC=[<by_te>,[<by_ta>]]

Options: <by_te> 0 No flow control on DTE.

1 Xon/Xoff flow control onDCE. Control characters

are removed by the DCE

interface.

2 RTS flow control on DCE.

3 Xon/Xoff flow control onDCE. Control characters

are passed to the remoteDCE/DTE.

Default = 2.

<by_ta> 0 No flow control on DCE.

1 Xon/Xoff flow control onDTE.

2 CTS flow control on DCE.

Default = 2.

Example: AT+IFC=2,2

OK

Read command: AT+IFC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+IFC?

+IFC: 2,2

OK

Page 275: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 275/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 276

Online Reference

Test command: AT+IFC=? Always returns (0-3),(0-2).

Example: AT+IFC=?

+IFC: (0-3),(0-2)

OK

Page 276: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 276/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 277

Online Reference

S0 Automatic answer control  

Description: Defines the automatic answering feature of the Infrared

Modem. A non-zero value specifies the number of ringsbefore the call is answered.

Note that the call is always answered in the current FaxClass, regardless of whether the incoming call is voice,data or fax.

Set command: S0=[<rcnt>]

Options: <rcnt> 0 Disable automatic answer.1 - 7 Answer after the specified

number of rings.

Default = 0.

Example: ATS0=0

OK

Read command: S0? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS0?

000

OK

Test command: S0=? Always returns (0-7).

Example: ATS0=?

S0: (0-7)

OK

Page 277: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 277/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 278

Online Reference

S6 Blind dial delay control  

Description: Defines the number of seconds to wait before call

addressing when a dial-tone is not detected. Thiscommand is ignored by the Infrared Modem and is onlyincluded for compatibility.

Set command: S6=[<dly>]

Options: <dly> 2 - 255

Default = 2.

Example: ATS6=2

OK

Read command: S6? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS6?

002

OK

Test command: S6=? Always returns (2-255).

Example: ATS6=?

S6: (2-255)

OK

Page 278: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 278/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 279

Online Reference

S7 Connection completion timeout 

Description: Defines the maximum time allowed between completion

of dialling and the connection being established. If thistime is exceeded then the connection is aborted.

Set command: S7=[<tmo>]

Options: <tmo> 1 - 255 Timeout value in seconds.

Default = 50.

Example: ATS7=50

OK

Read command: S7? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS7?

050

OK

Test command: S7=? Always returns (1-255).

Example: ATS7=?

S7: (1-255)

OK

Page 279: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 279/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 280

Online Reference

S8 Comma dial modifier delay control 

Description: Implemented for compatibility only.

Set command: S8=[<dly>]

Options: <dly> 1 - 255 The value of the dialmodifier delay in seconds.

Default = 2.

Example: ATS8=2

OK

Read command: S8? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATS8?

002

OK

Test command: S8=? Always returns (1-255).

Example: ATS8=?

S8: (1-255)

OK

Page 280: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 280/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 281

Online Reference

S10 Automatic disconnect delay control 

Description: This parameter specifies the amount of time that the

DCE will remain connected to the line after the absenceof received line signal. This command is ignored by theInfrared Modem and is only included for compatibility.

Set command: S10=[<val>]

Options: <val> 1-254

Example: ATS10=2

OK

Read command: S10?

Example: ATS10?

002

OK

Test command: S10=? Always returns (1-254).

Example: ATS10=?

S10: (1-254)

OK

Page 281: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 281/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 282

Online Reference

M Monitor speaker control  

Description: Define the activity of the speaker. This command is

ignored by the Infrared Modem and is only included forcompatibility.

Set command: M=[<speaker>]

Options: <speaker> 0-3 0 is off during the entire call.

Examples: ATM=0

OK

Read command: M?

Example: ATM?

M: 0

OK

Test command: M=? Always returns (0-3).

Example: ATM=?

M: (0-3)

OK

Page 282: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 282/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 283

Online Reference

X Call progress monitoring control 

Description: Define whether the dial tone detection and busy tone

detection are to be used during a call setup.

Set command: X=[<n>] or X[<n>]

Options: <n> 0 Busy and dial tonedetection off. No line speedreported on connection.

1 Busy and dial tonedetection off. Report

linespeed on connection.

2 Busy detection on and dialtone detection off. Reportline speed on connection.

3 Busy detect off and dial tonedetection on. Report linespeed on connection.

4 Busy detect and dial tonedetection on. Report linespeed on connection.

Default = 4.

Examples: ATX4

OK

Read command: X? Returns the current setting.

Example: ATX?

X: 4

OK

Test command: X=? Always returns (0-4).

Example: ATX=?

X: (0-4)

OK

Page 283: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 283/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 284

Online Reference

5.7 Ensemble S4/B : GSM Extended Error Reporting

+CEER Extended error report 

Description: Returns the text description of the last error encounteredin an unsuccessful connection.

Execute command: +CEER

Returns: <report> Text string containingreason of last call clearing

or unsuccessful call set-up

(originating or answering).

Example: AT+CEER

+CEER: failure

OK

Test command: +CEER=?

Example: AT+CEER=?

OK

Page 284: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 284/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 285

Online Reference

5.8 Ensemble C6/B : Data Compression

+DS Data compression  

Description: This extended-format compound parameter controls theV.42 bis data compression function if provided in theTAE. .

Set command: +DS=[<direc-tion>[,<compression_negotiation>[,<max_dict>[,<max_string>]]]]

Options<direction>:

specifies the desired direction(s) of operation ofthe data compression function; from the TE point

of view

Value 0 Disable V.42 bis

1 Enable V.42bis in transmit directiononly

2 Enable V.42bis in receive direction

only

3 Enable V.42bis compression bothways.Default=3

<compression_negotiation>:

specifies whether or not the TAE should continueto operate if the desired result is not obtained

Value 0 Accept connection if compression is

negotiated according to direction.Default=0

1 Disconnect if compression is notnegotiated according to direction

<max_dict>: specifies the maximum number of dictionaryentries which should be negotiated

Value 512-4096 Maximum dictionary size.Default=4096

Page 285: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 285/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 286

Online Reference

<max_string>: specifies the maximum string length to be

negotiated (V.42bis P2)

Value 6-250 Maximum string length. Default=32Example: AT+DS=0,1,512,6

OK

Read command: +DS? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+DS?

+DS: 3,0,4096,32

OK

Test command: +DS=?

Example: AT+DS=?

+DS: (0-3),(0,1),(512-4096),(6-250)

OK

Page 286: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 286/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 287

Online Reference

+DR Data compression reporting 

Description: If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted at

the point after error control negotiation (handshaking) atwhich the TAE has determined which data compressiontechnique will be used (if any) and the direction ofoperation..

Set command: +DR=<value>

<value> 0 Disable compression modereporting

1 Enable compression modereporting

Default=0

Example: AT+DR=1

OK

Read command: +DR? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+DR?

+DR: 0

OK

Test command: +DR=?

Example: AT+DR=?

+DR: (0,1)

OK

Page 287: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 287/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 288

Online Reference

Unsolicited Result Codes

+DR Data Compression Indication 

Description: The intermediate result code is issued after the ErrorControl Report (+ER) and before the final result code(e.g. CONNECT). Use the AT+DR command to enablethe indication.

Unsolicited Resultcode: +DR:<type>

<type>: NONE No data compression negotiated

V42B V.42 bis data compression negotiated

V42B RD V.42 bis half duplex compressionnegotiated on received data

V42B TD V.42 bis half duplex compressionnegotiated on transmitted data

Page 288: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 288/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 289

Online Reference

5.9 Ensemble S10/B : GSM Mobile EquipmentError Control

+CMEE Report mobile equipment error 

Description: Enables or disables mobile phone error reporting.

Set command: +CMEE=[<n>]

Options: <n> 0 Disable +CMEE errorreporting.

1 Enable +CMEE errorreporting. Use numeric<err> values.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+CMEE=1 Enable, error numeric.

OK

Read command: +CMEE? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+CMEE?

+CMEE: 1 Enabled.

OK

Test command: +CMEE=?

Example: AT+CMEE=?

+CMEE: (0,1)

OK

Page 289: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 289/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 290

Online Reference

5.10 Ensemble C18/B : Fax Class 1

Some fax commands can only be used during connection to a remotefacsimile and return ERROR otherwise. Most fax commands return ERROR

when the appropriate Fax Class is not selected beforehand.

+FCLASS Capabilities Identification and Control 

Description: Sets the service class.

Set command: +FCLASS=<class>

Options: <class> 0 Data modem.

1 Service Class 1 faxmodem.

2 Service Class 2 faxmodem.

Example: AT+FCLASS=1

OK

Read command: +FCLASS? Returns the current serviceclass setting.

Example: AT+FCLASS?

1

OK

Test command: +FCLASS=? Provides the service

classes available as a list ofcomma separated values.

Example: AT+FCLASS=?

0,1,2

OK

Page 290: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 290/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 291

Online Reference

+FMI Manufacturer identification 

Description: Request manufacturer’s identification.

+FMM Request product identification 

Description: Request model identification.

Read command: +FMI?

Example: AT+FMI?

Ericsson

OK

Read command: +FMM?

Example: AT+FMM?

<TAE Model Identification>

OK

Page 291: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 291/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 292

Online Reference

+FMR Request version 

Description: Request model revision.

+FTS Stop transmission and wait 

Description: Stops the transmission for the specified period.

Read command: +FMR?

Example: AT+FMR?

9910080907

OK

Set command: +FTS=<Time>

Options: <Time> 0 - 255 The silence period in units

of 10 ms.

Example: AT+FTS=8

OK

Test command: +FTS=? Always returns (0-255).

Example: AT+FTS=?

(0-255)

OK

Page 292: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 292/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 293

Online Reference

+FRS Receive silence 

Description: Waits for silence on the line for the specified period.

Set command: +FRS=<Time>

Options: <Time> 0 - 255 The silence period in units of10 ms. Entering a character

will abort the silence period.

Example: AT+FRS=8

OK

Test command: +FRS=? Always returns (0-255).

Example: AT+FRS=?

(0-255)

OK

Page 293: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 293/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 294

Online Reference

+FTM Facsimile transmit 

Description: Start transmiting fax data at given speed.

Set command: +FTM=<Mod>

Options: <Mod> 24 V.27ter 2,400 bps.

48 V.27ter 4,800 bps.

72 V.29 7,200 bps.

96 V.29 9,600 bps.

Example: AT+FTM=96

CONNECT

OK

Test command: +FTM=? Always returns

(24,48,72,96).

Example: AT+FTM=?

(24,48,72,96)

OK

Page 294: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 294/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 295

Online Reference

+FRM Facsimile receive 

Description: Selects facsimile receive mode.

Set command: +FRM=<Mod>

Options: <Mod> 24 V.27ter 2,400 bps.

48 V.27ter 4,800 bps.

72 V.29 7,200 bps.

96 V.29 9,600 bps.

Example: AT+FRM=96

CONNECT

Test command: +FRM=? Always returns(24,48,72,96).

Example: AT+FRM=?

(24,48,72,96)

OK

Page 295: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 295/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 296

Online Reference

+FTH Transmit HDLC  

Description: HDLC transmit speed.

+FRH Receive HDLC  

Description: HDLC receive speed.

Set command: +FTH=<Mod>

Options: <Mod> 3 V.21 Ch2 300 bps.

Example: AT+FTH=3

CONNECT

Test command: +FTH=? Always returns (3).

Example: AT+FTH=?

(3)

OK

Set command: +FRH=<speed>

Options: <speed> 3 V.21 Ch2 300 bps.

Example: AT+FRH=3

CONNECT

Test command: +FRH=? Always returns 3.Example: AT+FRH=?

(3)

OK

Page 296: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 296/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 297

Online Reference

5.11 Ensemble C19/B : Fax Class 2

Some fax commands can only be used during connection to a remotefacsimile and return ERROR otherwise. Most fax commands return ERROR

when the appropriate Fax Class is not selected beforehand.

+FCLASS Capabilities Identification and Control 

Description: Sets the service class.

Set command: +FCLASS=<class>

Options: <class> 0 Data modem.

1 Service Class 1 faxmodem.

2 Service Class 2 faxmodem.

Example: AT+FCLASS=1

OK

Read command: +FCLASS? Returns the current serviceclass setting.

Example: AT+FCLASS?

1

OK

Test command: +FCLASS=? Provides the service

classes available as a list ofcomma separated values.

Example: AT+FCLASS=?

0,1,2

OK

Page 297: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 297/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 298

Online Reference

+FAA Fax auto answer setting 

Description: Used to determine if the fax setting is selected by auto

answer or by the setting in +FCLASS.

Set command: +FAA=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Answer according to

settings in FCLASS only.

Example: AT+FAA=0

OK

Read command: +FAA? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FAA?

0

OK

Test command: +FAA=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FAA=?

(0)

OK

Page 298: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 298/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 299

Online Reference

+FAXERR Request hang-up cause code 

Description: Returns the code of the error which caused the last

hang-up.

Read command: +FAXERR?

Response: +FAXERR=<value>

<value> 0 Normal and proper end ofconnection Mandatoryvalue.

1 Ring Detect withoutsuccessful handshake.

2 Call aborted, from +FK or<CAN>.

3 No Loop Current.

10 Unspecified Phase A errorMandatory value.

11 No Answer (T.30 T1timeout) [2].

20 Unspecified TransmitPhase B error Mandatoryvalue.

21 Remote cannot receive orsend.

22 COMREC error in transmitPhase B.

23 COMREC invalidcommand received.

24 RSPEC error.

25 DCS sent three timeswithout response.

Page 299: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 299/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 300

Online Reference

26 DIS/DTC received 3 times;

DCS not recognized.

27 Failure to train at 2400 bpsor FMINSP value.

28 RSPREC invalid responsereceived.

40 Unspecified TransmitPhase C error Mandatoryvalue.

43 TE to TAE data underflow.50 Unspecified Transmit

Phase D error Mandatoryvalue.

51 RSPREC error.

52 No response to MPSrepeated 3 times.

53 Invalid response to MPS.54 No response to EOP

repeated 3 times.

55 Invalid response to EOP.

56 No response to EOMrepeated 3 times.

57 Invalid response to EOM.

58 Unable to continue afterPIN or PIP.

70 Unspecified ReceivePhase B error Mandatoryvalue.

71 RSPREC error.

72 COMREC error.

Page 300: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 300/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 301

Online Reference

73 T.30 T2 [2] timeout,

expected page notreceived.

74 T.30 T1 [2] timeout afterEOM received.

90 Unspecified Receive

Phase C error.

91 Missing EOL after 5

seconds (section 3.2 T.4[3]).

92 -unused code-.

93 TAE to TE buffer overflow.

94 Bad CRC or frame (ECM orBFT modes).

100 Unspecified ReceivePhase D errors.

101 RSPREC invalid responsereceived.

102 COMREC invalid responsereceived.

103 Unable to continue afterPIN or PIP.

120-255 -reserved codes-.

Example: AT+FAXERR?

1

OK

Test command: +FAXERR=? Always returns (0-255).

Example: AT+FAXERR=?

(0-255)

OK

Page 301: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 301/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 302

Online Reference

+FBADLIN Number of consecutive bad lines to accept 

Description: Sets the maximum acceptable number of consecutive

bad lines.

Set command: +FBADLIN=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Error checking not present

or disabled.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+FBADLIN=0

OK

Read command: +FBADLIN? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FBADLIN?

0

OK

Test command: +FBADLIN=?

Example: AT+FBADLIN=?

(0)

OK

Page 302: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 302/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 303

Online Reference

+FBADMUL Bad line multiplier parameter 

Description: Sets the maximum acceptable percentage of bad lines

per page multiplication value.

Set command: +FBADMUL=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Error checking not present

or disabled.

20 5% error rate.

0-255 valid values.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+FBADMUL=20

OK

Read command: +FBADMUL? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FBADMUL?

0

OK

Test command: +FBADMUL=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FBADMUL=?

(0)

OK

Page 303: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 303/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 304

Online Reference

+FBOR Facsimile page transfer bit order parameter 

Description: Set the bit order for negotiation (<bit n>) and facsimile

page transfer (<bit f>).

Set command: +FBOR=[<value>]

<value> is the sum of <bit f> and <bit n> where:

<bit f> 0 = same bit order.

1 = reverse bit order.

<bit n> 0 = same bit order.

2 = reverse bit order.

Options: <value> 0 bit f + bit n = 0.

1 bit f + bit n = 1.

2 bit f + bit n = 2.

3 bit f + bit n = 3.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+FBOR=0

OK

Read command: +FBOR? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FBOR?

3

OK

Test command: +FBOR=? Always returns (0-3).

Example: AT+FBOR=?

(0-3)

OK

Page 304: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 304/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 305

Online Reference

+FBUF Buffer size report 

Description: Request buffering parameters.

Read command: +FBUF?

Returns: <bs>,<xoft>,<xont>,<bc>

Options: <bs> = buffer size.

<xoft> = XOFF threshold.

<xont> = XON threshold.

<bc> = current number ofcharacters in buffer.

Example: AT+FBUF?

256,0,0,0

OK

Page 305: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 305/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 306

Online Reference

+FBUG Session Message Report 

Description: Request buffering parameters.

Execute command: +FBUG=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Disables HDLC framereporting.

1 Enables reporting.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+FBUG=1

OK

Read command: +FBUG?

Example: AT+FBUG?

1

OK

Test command: +FBUG=?

Example: AT+FBUG=?

(0,1)

OK

Page 306: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 306/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 307

Online Reference

+FCQ Copy quality checking 

Description: Copy quality checking.

Set command: +FCQ=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Do not perform qualitychecking.

Example: AT+FCQ=0

OK

Read command: +FCQ? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FCQ?

0

OK

Test command: +FCQ=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FCQ=?

(0)

OK

Page 307: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 307/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 308

Online Reference

+FCR Capability to receive parameter 

Description: Capability to receive.

Set command: +FCR=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Can not receive fax but canbe polled.

1 Can receive fax.

Default = 1.

Example: AT+FCR=1

OK

Read command: +FCR? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FCR?

1

OK

Test command: +FCR=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: AT+FCR=?

(0,1)

OK

Page 308: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 308/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 309

Online Reference

+FCIG Local polling ID parameter 

Description: Local polling ID.

Set command: +FCIG=<local polling ID string>

Options: <local polling ID string>

String of 0 to 20 characterslength.

Example: AT+FCIG="Ericsson Fax"

OK

Read command: +FCIG? Returns the current polling

string.

Example: AT+FCIG?

Ericsson Fax

OK

Test command: +FCIG=? Always returns (20)(32-127).

Example: AT+FCIG=?

(20)(32-127)

OK

Page 309: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 309/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 310

Online Reference

+FCTCRTY Continue to correct count during ECM 

Description: Continue to correct count during ECM.

Set command: +FCTCRTY=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0-255 <value> is in units of 4retries.

Default = 0, disabled.

Example: AT+FCTCRTY=1

OK

Read command: +FCTCRTY? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FCTCRTY?

0

OK

Test command: +FCTCRTY=? Always returns (0-255).

Example: AT+FCTCRTY=?

(0-255)

OK

Page 310: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 310/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 311

Online Reference

+FDFFC Data format failure check 

Description: Data format failure check.

Set command: +FDFFC=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Disable mismatchchecking.

Example: AT+FDFFC=0

OK

Read command: +FDFFC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FDFFC?

0

OK

Test command: +FDFFC=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FDFFC=?

(0)

OK

Page 311: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 311/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 312

Online Reference

+FDCC TAE Capability parameters 

Description: This command allows the TE to sense and constrain the

capabilities of the facsimile TAE.

Set command: +FDCC=<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

Options: <vr> = vertical resolution.

0 Normal, 98 lpi.

1 Fine, 196 lpi.

Default = 1.

<br> = bit rate.

0 2400 bit/s V.27ter.

1 4800 bit/s V.27ter.

2 7200 bit/s V.29 or V.17,optional.

3 9600 bit/s V.29 or V.17,

optional.

Default = 3.

<wd> = page width.

0 1728 pixels in 215 mm.

1 2048 pixels in 255 mm,optional.

2 2432 pixels in 303 mm,optional.

3 1216 pixels in 151 mm,optional.

4 864 pixels in 107 mm,

optional.

Default = 0.

Page 312: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 312/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 313

Online Reference

<ln> = page length.

0 A4, 297 mm.

1 B4, 364, optional.

2 Unlimited length,optional.

Default = 2.

<df> = data compression format.

0 1-D modified Huffman.

1 2-D modified Read,

optional.

2 2-D uncompressed mode,optional.

3 2-D modified Read,optional.

Default = 0.

<ec> = error correction.

0 Disable ECM

<bf> = binary file transfer.

0 Disable ECM

Page 313: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 313/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 314

Online Reference

<st> = scan time per line.

0 0 ms

1 5 ms

2 10 ms

3 10 ms

4 20 ms

5 20 ms

6 40 ms

7 40 ms

Default = 0.

Example: AT+FDCC=0,3,0,2,0,0,0,1

OK

Read command: +FDCC?

Example: AT+FDCC?

0,3,0,2,0,0,0,1

OK

Test command: +FDCC=?

Example: AT+FDCC=?

(0-1),(0-3),(0-4),(0-2),

(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)

OK

Page 314: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 314/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 315

Online Reference

+FDCS Session results 

Description: Current session results.

Read command: +FDCS?

Returns: <vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

Options: <vr> = vertical resolution.

<br> = bit rate.

<wd> = page width.

<ln> = page length.<df> = data compression format.

<ec> = error correction.

<bf> = binary file transfer.

<st> = scan time per line.

Please refer to the +FDCCcommand for furtherinformation on theseparameters.

Example: AT+FDCS?

0,3,0,2,0,0,0,1

OK

Test command: +FDCS=? Always returns

(0-1),(0-3),(0-4),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7).

Example: AT+FDCS=?

(0-1),(0-3),(0-4),(0-2),

(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)

OK

Page 315: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 315/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 316

Online Reference

+FDIS Current session negotiation parameters 

Description: Current session negotiation parameters.

Set command: +FDIS=<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

Options: <vr> 0 Normal, 98 dpi.

1 Fine, 196 dpi.

Default = 1.

<br> 0 2400 bps.

1 4800 bps.2 7200 bps.

3 9600 bps.

Default = 3.

<wd> Page width.

0 1728 pixels in 215 mm.

1 2048 pixels in 255 mm.

2 2432 pixels in 303 mm.

3 1216 pixels in 151 mm.

4 364 pixels in 107 mm.

Default = 0.

<ln> Page length.

0 A4, 297 mm.

1 B4, 364 mm.

2 unlimited.

Default = 2.

Page 316: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 316/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 317

Online Reference

<df> Data compression format.

0 1-D modified huffman.

1 2-D modified read.

2 2-D uncompressed mode.

3 2-D modified modified read.

Default = 0.

<ec> Error correction.

0 Disable ECM.

<bf> Binary file transfer.

0 Disable BFT.

<st> Scan time per line.

0-7 0-40 ms depending on <vr>setting.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+FDIS=0,30,2,0,0,0

OK

Read command: +FDIS? Returns the currentsettings.

Example: AT+FDIS?

1,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

OK

Test command: +FDIS=? Always returns(0-1),(0-3),(0-4),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7).

Example: AT+FDIS=?

(0-1),(0-3),(0-4),(0-2),

(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)

OK

Page 317: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 317/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 318

Online Reference

+FDR Fax data receive command 

Description: The +FDR command initiates transition to Phase C data

reception. This can occur after answering, after dialling,after a document received, or after a page is received.

Action command: +FDR

Example: AT+FCLASS=2

OK

AT+FCR=1

OK

AT+FLID=<local ID>

RING <-

ATA

+FCON

[+FTSI : "<discodes>]

OK

AT+FDR

+FCFR

[+FDCS: <dcs codes>]

CONNECT

<DC2> Page data stream.

<DLE><ETX>

+FPTS:1, <1c>

+FET:0 <-

OK

Page 318: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 318/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 319

Online Reference

AT+FDR

CONNECT

<DC2> Page data stream.

<DLE><ETX>

+FPTS: 1, (1c)

+FET:2 <-

OK

AT+FDR

+FHNG:0

Page 319: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 319/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 320

Online Reference

+FDT Fax data transmission command 

Description: The FDT command prefixes Phase C data transmission.

When the TAE is ready to accept Phase C data, it willissue the negotiation responses and the CONNECTresult code to the TAE. The DF, VR, WD, and LNsubparameters are optional.

Action command: +FDT[=<df>,<vr>,<wd>,<ln>]

Options: <df> Data compression format.

<vr> Vertical resolution.

<wd> Page width.

<ln> Page length.

Example: AT+FCLASS=2

OK

AT+FLID=<local ID>

OK

ATD<dial string>

+FCON

[+FCSI : "<csi>]

+FDIS:<dis codes>

OK

AT+FDT

+FDCS<dcs codes>

CONNECT

<XON>

OK

Page 320: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 320/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 321

Online Reference

<DLE><ETX> First page data.

AT+FET=0

+FPTS:1

OK

CONNECT

<XON>

AT+FDT

OK

<DLE><DTX> Second page data.

AT+FET=2

+FPTS:1

+FHNG:0

OK

Page 321: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 321/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 322

Online Reference

+FECM Error correction mode 

Description: Defines error correction mode.

Set command: +FECM=<value>

<value> 0 Error correction disabled ornot supported.

Example: AT+FECM=0

OK

Read command: +FECM? Always returns 0.

Example: AT+FECM?

0

OK

Test command: +FECM=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FECM=?

(0)

OK

Page 322: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 322/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 323

Online Reference

+FET Page punctuation 

Description: This command is used to punctuate page and document

transmission, after one or more +FDT commands.

Set command: +FET=<ppm>[,<pc>,<bc>, <fc>]

Options: <ppm> Next page type.

0 [PPS-]MPS - another pagenext, same document.

1 [PPS-]EOM - another

document next.2 [PPS-]EOP - no more

pages or documents.

<pc> Page Count.

<bc> Block Count.

<fc> Frame Count.

Example: AT+FET=0

+FTPS:1

OK

Read command: +FET?

Example: AT+FET?

1

OK

Test command: +FET=?

Example: AT+FET=?

+FET: (0-2),(0-255),(0-255),(0-255)

OK

Page 323: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 323/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 324

Online Reference

+FK Orderly fax abort  

Description: Aborts fax transmission.

+FLID Local polling ID parameter 

Description: Allows you to define the local ID string.

Execute command: +FK

Example: AT+FK

+FHNG:2 (“2” is a hangup statuscode)

OK

Set command: +FLID=<local ID string>

Options: <local ID string> String of 0 to 20 characters

length.

Example: AT+FLID="Ericsson"

OK

Read command: +FLID? Returns the current pollingstring.

Example: AT+FLID?

"Ericsson"

OK

Test command: +FLID=? Always returns(20)(32-127).

Example: AT+FLID=?

(20)(32-127)

OK

Page 324: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 324/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 325

Online Reference

+FLNFC Page length format conversion parameter 

Description: Defines page length format conversion.

Set command: +FLNFC=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Disable mismatchchecking.

Example: AT+FLNFC=0

OK

Read command: +FLNFC? Returns current settings.

Example: AT+FLNFC?

0

OK

Test command: +FLNFC=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FLNFC=?

(0)

OK

Page 325: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 325/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 326

Online Reference

+FLPL Document for polling parameter 

Description: Used by the DTE to indicate to the DCE facsimile

machine that it has a document ready for polling. Thisinformation is forwarded to the remote FAX.

Set command: +FLPL=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 No document to poll.

1 Document available forpolling.

Default = 0.Example: AT+FLPL=1

OK

Read command: +FLPL? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FLPL?

1

OK

Test command: +FLPL=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: AT+FLPL=?

(0,1)

OK

Page 326: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 326/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 327

Online Reference

+FMDL Request product identification 

Description: Returns the product identification of a Class 2 fax

machine.

+FMFR Request manufacturer’s identification 

Description: Returns the manufacturer identification for a Class 2 faxmachine.

Read command: +FMDL?

Example: AT+FMDL?

<TAE Model Identification>

OK

Read command: +FMFR?

Example: AT+FMFR?

Ericsson

OK

Page 327: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 327/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 328

Online Reference

+FMINSP Minimum facsimile page transfer speed parameter 

Description: Set the minimum negotiable speed parameter.

Set command: +FMINSP=[<br>]

Options: <br> 0 2400 bps V.27 ter.

1 4800 bps V.27 ter.

2 7200 bps V.29 or V.17.

3 9600 bps V.29 or V.17.

Example: AT+FMINSP=3 Set rate to 9600 bps.OK

Read command: +FMINSP? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FMINSP?

3

OK

Test command: +FMINSP=? Always returns (0-3).

Example: AT+FMINSP=?

(0-3)

OK

Page 328: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 328/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 329

Online Reference

+FPHCTO Facsimile page transfer timeout parameter 

Description: Sets the period the Infrared Modem waits for another

page from the PC before it assumes there are no morepages and aborts.

Set command: +FPHCTO=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 - 255 The timeout period in unitsof 100ms.

Default = 30.

Example: AT+FPHCTO=30

OK

Read command: +FPHCTO? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FPHCTO?

30

OK

Test command: +FPHCTO=? Always returns (0-255).

Example: AT+FPHCTO=?

(0-255)

OK

Page 329: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 329/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 330

Online Reference

+FPTS Page transfer status parameter 

Description: Set post page transfer response.

Set command: +FPTS=<ppr>

Options: <ppr> 1 Page good.

2 Page bad; retrainrequested.

3 Page good; retrainrequested.

Example: AT+FPTS=1

OK

Read command: +FPTS? Returns current settings.

Example: AT+FPTS?

1

OK

Test command: +FPTS=? Always returns (1-3).

Example: AT+FPTS=?

(1-3)

OK

Page 330: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 330/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 331

Online Reference

+FREV Request DCE revision 

Description: Returns the version, revision level or other information

related to a Class 2 device.

+FRBC Receive data block size 

Description: Receive data block size.

Read command: +FREV?

Example: AT+FREV?

9903020939

OK

Set command: +FRBC=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Block can only be set to asize of 0 bytes.

Example: AT+FRBC=0

OK

Read command: +FRBC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FRBC?

0

OK

Test command: +FRBC=? Always returns (0).Example: AT+FRBC=?

(0)

OK

Page 331: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 331/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 332

Online Reference

+FREL Facsimile page transfer EOL alignment parameter 

Description: Received EOL alignment.

Set command: +FREL=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 EOL patterns are bitaligned as received.

Example: AT+FREL=0

OK

Read command: +FREL? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FREL?

0

OK

Test command: +FREL=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FREL=?

(0)

OK

Page 332: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 332/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 333

Online Reference

+FSPL Enable polling parameter 

Description: Used to indicate if the PC wishes or is able to poll a

document.

Set command: +FSPL=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Do not want to poll.

1 Can receive a polleddocument.

Default = 0.

Example: AT+FSPL=1

OK

Read command: +FSPL? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FSPL?

1

OK

Test command: +FSPL=? Always returns (0,1).

Example: AT+FSPL=?

(0,1)

OK

Page 333: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 333/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 334

Online Reference

+FTBC Fax page transfer data transmit byte count parameter 

Description: Sets the size of the transmit data block.

Set command: +FTBC=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Block can only be set to asize of 0 bytes.

Example: AT+FTBC=0

OK

Read command: +FTBC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FTBC?

0

OK

Test command: +FTBC=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FTBC=?

(0)

OK

Page 334: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 334/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 335

Online Reference

+FVRFC Vertical resolution conversion parameter 

Description: Disables mismatch checking.

Set command: +FVRFC=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Disable mismatchchecking.

Example: AT+FVRFC=0

OK

Read command: +FVRFC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FVRFC?

0

OK

Test command: +FVRFC=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FVRFC=?

(0)

OK

Page 335: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 335/351

AT Commands Modem Terminated

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 336

Online Reference

+FWDFC Page width conversion parameter 

Description: Width format conversion checking.

Set command: +FWDFC=[<value>]

Options: <value> 0 Disable mismatchchecking.

Example: AT+FWDFC=0

OK

Read command: +FWDFC? Returns the current setting.

Example: AT+FWDFC?

0

OK

Test command: +FWDFC=? Always returns (0).

Example: AT+FWDFC=?

(0)

OK

Page 336: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 336/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 337

Online Reference

Glossary

Analog

An analog signal can have any value between two limits. Traditionaltelephone lines, for example, transfer the human voice, itself ananalogue signal, by means of a continuously varying electrical

voltage. This voltage is an electrical representation of the pressureproduced by the sound on the telephone microphone.

ASCII

Acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. Astandard code used for transferring data between computers andassociated equipment.

Asynchronous communication

Data communication in which data elements are NOT separatedaccording to time. Instead, a special code such as a start bit and astop bit is used. By using a code, in lieu of time, asynchronouscommunication is more tolerant of time variations. Complex timingcircuits are not needed. The serial port and the COM port of acomputer are associated with asynchronous communication, as is

the RS-232-C interface. Also some end to end modem protocols areasynchronous.

AT

The characters AT stand for Attention and tells the Infrared Modemthat a command follows. AT must be used at the beginning of acommand line or dial string.

AT command set

The commands used to control the Infrared Modem.

Auto-answer mode

The state in which the Infrared Modem automatically answers thetelephone when it rings.

Page 337: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 337/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 338

Online Reference

Bps

Acronym for bits per second (bits/s). A measure of speed at whichbits are transmitted over the telephone lines.

Carrier

The frequency used by two connecting modems to transmit and

receive data.

CCITT

Consultative Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy.

A European based advisory committee established by the UnitedNations to recommend international communication protocolstandards.

CD

Carrier Detect. An EIA232 signal sent from the Infrared Modem to

your computer, usually indicating that your Infrared Modem hasdetected a carrier signal over the communications line.

Command line

A line of alphanumeric characters sent to the Infrared Modem toinstruct the Infrared Modem to perform the commands specified inthe line of characters.

Off-line command mode

The operational state in which the Infrared Modem can accept typedcommands.

COM (communications) port

The name allocated to the serial port through which digital signals areexchanged between the computer and a serial peripheral. Forexample COM1 and COM2.

Page 338: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 338/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 339

Online Reference

CTS

Clear To Send. An EIA232 signal sent from a modem to thecomputer, usually indicating that the modem is ready to receive data.

On-line data mode

The state the Infrared Modem is in when transmitting or receiving

data over the telephone line.

DCD

Data Carrier Connect. See the &C command.

DCE

Data Communications Equipment. This term applies to modems andto other equipment that provide communication between dataterminal equipment and the telephone line.

Default setting

A setting that the Infrared Modem will always use unless specifiedotherwise.

Digital transmission

A digital signal can have only two values. These can be, for example,ON and OFF, HIGH and LOW or 1 and 2. A digital signal is usuallytransferred by means of a voltage which is either HIGH or LOW.

Conventional modems communicate by means of audio tones which

can use the analog telephone network. (See analog) The InfraredModem links through your mobile telephone to a digital network andtherefore has no need to use audio encoding. However, when youuse your mobile telephone for a voice call, the analog signal from themicrophone must be converted into a digital signal. This is done by a

converter which samples the signal voltage several thousand timesper second. Each sample is converted into a binary number whichrepresents the voltage at that instant, eg 10011010, and the binarynumbers are sent as a serial stream down the digital network.

Page 339: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 339/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 340

Online Reference

DSR

Data Set Ready. An EIA232 signal sent from the Infrared Modem tothe computer, usually indicating that the Infrared Modem is ready to

establish a connection.

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment. The equipment that provides data, suchas a computer or terminal.

DTR

Data Terminal Ready. An EIA232 signal sent from the computer tothe Infrared Modem, usually indicating that the computer is ready tobegin communication.

EIA

Electronics Industries Association. A U.S. based group that forms

technical standards and coordinates ITU-TCCITT activities in theUnited States.

EOL

End of line.

EOP

End of page.

EOMEnd of message.

Escape code

A series of three consecutive characters (default is + + +) sent to theInfrared Modem, causing it to exit on-line data mode and enter on-line command mode.

Page 340: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 340/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 341

Online Reference

Factory default settings

The profile configuration that is in effect when the Infrared Modem isshipped from the factory.

Final result code

A message sent from the Infrared Modem to inform the PC that

execution of an entered AT command has been completed.Examples are OK and ERROR.

Flow control

The use of characters or EIA232 signals to start and stop the flow ofdata to avoid data loss during buffering.

Full duplex

Communication involving data transmitted in two directionssimultaneously.

Half duplex

Communication involving data transmitted in two directions, but notat the same time.

Intermediate result code

Information sent from the Infrared Modem to the PC as a response toan executed AT command. Intermediate result codes are always

followed by a final result code. For example +CBC: 0,100.

ISDN

The term used to refer to the digital public switched telephonenetwork.

Page 341: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 341/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 342

Online Reference

ITU-T

The ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T), is apermanent organ of the International Telecommunication Union. The

ITU-T is responsible for studying technical, operating and tariffquestions and issuing Recommendations on them with a view tostandardizing telecommunication on a world wide basis.

As a consequence of a reform process within the InternationalTelecommunication Union (ITU), the CCITT ceased to exist as of 28February 1993. In its place the ITU TelecommunicationStandardization Sector (ITU-T) was created as of 1 March 1993.

MMI

Man-Machine Interface.

ME

Mobile Equipment. The Ericsson wireless terminal excluding the SIMcard, which in most cases is a mobile phone.

ModemModulator-Demodulator. A device that converts digital signals toanalog for transmission over telephone lines, then converts themback to digital at the other end of the line.

MS

This is the Ericsson wireless terminal being controlled through the setof commands described in this document.

Off hook

The Infrared Modem state similar to picking up a telephone receiver.The Infrared Modem goes off hook to dial or answer, and remains offhook while connected.

On hook

The Infrared Modem state similar to hanging up a telephone receiver.

Page 342: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 342/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 343

Online Reference

PIN

Personal identification number.

PDA

Personal Digital Assistant.

Protocols

The rules or procedures all modems must follow to communicate.

Result code

A message the Infrared Modem sends to the computer containinginformation about the state of the Infrared Modem.

RLP

Radio Link Protocol, an error correction protocol used during radiolink connections.

RLSDReceived Line Signal Detect. See AT command &C.

RTS

Request To Send. An EIA232 signal sent from the computer to theInfrared Modem, usually indicating that the computer is ready to senddata to the Infrared Modem.

RS-232-C interface

A communication standard established by the Electronics Industry

Association (Recommended Standard number 232, revision C).Originally established to standardize communication betweencomputer and modem. It was later adapted to become a popularstandard for communication between computer and any otherperipheral equipment, including other computers.

Page 343: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 343/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 344

Online Reference

Serial port

The port through which digital signals are exchanged between theInfrared Modem and the computer.

Short message service (SMS)

A text messaging service permitting the transmission of up to 160

characters to a facsimile, X400, telex and voice services or mobilephone.

Synchronous Communication

V.22bisITU-T standard for 2400 bps.

V.27ter

ITU-T standard for 4800 bps full-duplex modems connected toswitched telephone networks.

V.29ITU-T standard for 9600 bps half-duplex modems included inFAX machines.

V.42bis

ITU-T standard for the compression of asynchronous data.V.42bis is based on a dictionary that looks up common stringsand replaces the strings with code words. This reduces the

amount of characters actually transmitted. V.42bis has beenfound to be most effective for file transfers that contain longstrings of repetitive information and least effective for shortstrings of unique data. Require LAPM or MNP2, MNP3 orMNP4 as error correcting.

SIM

Subscriber Identity Module.

Page 344: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 344/351

Glossary

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 345

Online Reference

TA

Terminal Adaptor, which in most cases is a PCMCIA (PersonalComputer Memory Card International Association) card.

TAE

Terminal Adaptor Equipment.

TE

Terminal Equipment, which in most cases is a computer.

Unsolicited result code

A message sent from the Infrared Modem to the PC that is not aresponse to an executed AT command. For example RING.

Page 345: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 345/351

Index

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 346

Online Reference

Index

Symbols&C 274&D 274&F 39, 251&I 252* 42*BINARY 169

*CRING 258*EACS 235*EAID 224*EALR 187*EALS 77*EAM 220*EAMS 190*EAPN 211

*EAPS 209*EARS 188*EASM 222*EAST 221*EBCA 213, 218*ECAM 118*ECAR 177*ECAS 183

*ECAV 141*ECAW 178*ECBP 194*ECMW 247*ECSP 78*ECUR 196*EDIF 89

*EDIS 90*EDME 119

*EENL 197*EKSC 219*EKSP 199*EKSR 200*ELAN 120*ELIN 79*EMAR 122*EMIC 202

*EMIR 189*EMLR 248*EPEC 203*EPED 205*EPEE 204*EPEV 218*EPEW 207*EPHD 193

*EPNR 80*EPNW 82*EPRR 179*EPRW 181*EQVL 216*ERIL 123*ERIN 125*ERIP 126*ESAM 132*ESBL 133*ESCN 84*ESDF 134*ESIL 127*ESKL 128*ESKS 129

Page 346: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 346/351

Index

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 347

Online Reference

*ESLN 83*ESMA 130

*ESMM 131*ESNU 212*ESOM 135*ESTF 137*ESVM 87*ETXT 138*EVA 233*EVD 233

*EVH 233*EVOLC 218*EXVC 217*EYDO 241*EYPI 242*EYRE 240*EYRR 238*EYRV 241

+CACM 75+CALA 185+CAMM 76+CAOC 58+CBC 112+CBM 164+CBST 265+CCFC 67+CCLK 184+CCWA 69, 92+CEER 284+CFUN 50+CGMI 40+CGMM 40+CGMR 41

+CGSN 42+CHUP 44

+CIEV 140+CIMI 186+CIND 106+CKEV 139+CKPD 105+CLCK 97+CLIP 91, 110+CLIR 65

+CMEE 289+CMER 115+CMGD 155+CMGF 156+CMGL 148+CMGR 150+CMGS 152+CMGW 154

+CMOD 43+CMS 167+CMSS 153+CMT 166+CMTI 165+CMUX 234+CNMI 162+CNUM 62+COPS 62+CPAS 108+CPBF 173+CPBR 171+CPBS 170+CPBW 175+CPIN 110

Page 347: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 347/351

Index

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 348

Online Reference

+CPMS 146+CPUC 86

+CPWD 100+CR 256+CRC 45, 257+CREG 91+CRES 161+CRING 47+CRLP 264+CSAS 160

+CSCA 157+CSCB 159+CSCC 231+CSCS 37, 249+CSMS 144+CSQ 114+CSSI 94+CSSN 73

+CSSU 93+CVIB 117+DR 287+DS 285+FAA 298+FAXERR 299+FBADLIN 302+FBADMUL 303+FBOR 304+FBUF 305+FBUG 306+FCIG 309+FCLASS 290, 297+FCQ 307+FCR 308

+FCTCRTY 310+FDCC 312

+FDCS 315+FDFFC 311+FDIS 316+FDR 318+FDT 320+FECM 322+FET 323+FK 324

+FLID 324+FLNFC 325+FLPL 326+FMDL 327+FMFR 327+FMI 291+FMINSP 328+FMM 291

+FMR 292+FPHCTO 329+FPTS 330+FRBC 331+FREL 332+FREV 331+FRH 296+FRM 295+FRS 293+FSPL 333+FTBC 334+FTH 296+FTM 294+FTS 292+FVRFC 335

Page 348: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 348/351

Index

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 349

Online Reference

+FWDFC 336+GCAP 255

+GMI 253+GMM 253+GMR 42, 254+IFC 275+VTS 46+WS46 102

AA command 48, 259abort 245accessory additional indica-

tion 228accessory input dialog indica-

tion 229accessory menu indication

228

analog 337ASCII 337Asynchronouscommunication

337AT 38, 250AT command set 337AT Commands 17AT commands 337

data compression 285data compression reporting287

escape sequence charac-ter 267list of AT commands 24modem information 255

standard format 21viewing set parameters 23

AT Commands Modem Active249AT Commands Modem Termi-

nated 249AT Commands Phone Termi-

nal Terminated 37audio line response 195auto-answer mode 337

Bbits per second 338bps 338BUSY result code 12

C

carrier 338carrier detect 338CCITT 338, 340, 342CD 338Cellular result codes 16cellular result codes 16COM port 338command line 338

command state 338commandscommand line 21

configuringconfiguring software manu-ally 8, 9for data communications 8

Page 349: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 349/351

Index

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 350

Online Reference

for facsimile communica-tions 9

for V.25ter 8CONNECT + SPEED resultcode 12

CONNECT result code 12CTS 339

DD command 49, 260

data compression AT com-mand 285

data compression indication288

data compression reportingAT command 287

data,configuring for data 8DCD 339

DCE 339default setting 339

factory default settings341

delete entry 244delete phone 246digital transmission 339drivers, installing software

drivers 8DSR 340DTE 340DTR 340

EE command 55, 271

EIA 340EOL 340EOM 340EOP 340Ericsson divert function 95ERROR result code 11escape code 340escape sequence character

AT command 267

Ffacsimile

configuring for facsimile 9facsimile functions

in Infrared modem 7final result code 341flow control 341full duplex 341

Gget phones 245

HH command 48, 259half duplex 341

II 252Infrared modem

Page 350: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 350/351

Index

Revision R1A

T28 AT Command ® Page 351

Online Reference

configuring software manu-ally 8, 9

configuring the software 8data functions 7facsimile functions 7introduction to Infrared mo-dem 7locating a driver 8mobile phone manager 7

init string 8

installing software drivers 8intermediate result code 341introduction to Infrared mo-

dem 7ISDN 341ITU-T 342

L

L command 51

MM command 282manual configuring for the In-

frared modem 8ME 342

MMI 342mobile phone manager 7modem 342modem information AT com-

mands 255MS 342music mute indication re-

sponse 195

NNO CARRIER result code 12NO DIALTONE result code

12

OO command 262

off hook 342OK result code 10on hook 342On-line data mode 339

PP command 262parameters

viewing the settings 23PDA 343Phonebook Commands 170PIN 343play phonebook entry 243play prompt 243play training recording 244protocols 343

QQ command 56, 272

Page 351: Ericsson T28 _R1A

8/22/2019 Ericsson T28 _R1A

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ericsson-t28-r1a 351/351

Index

Rrecognise 243

register phone 246result code 343

*EAAI 228*EAII 229*EALV 195*EAMI 228*EDIF 95*EMIV 195

*EYAB 245*EYDE 244*EYDP 246*EYGP 245*EYPE 243*EYPP 243*EYPT 244*EYRE 243

*EYRP 246*EYSR 245*EYSS 246*EYTN 244+CRC 16+DR 288abort 245accessory additional indi-

cation 228accessory input dialog indi-cation 229accessory menu indication228

audio line 195BUSY 12

cellular 16compression 288

CONNECT 12delete entry 244delete phone 246enabling/disabling 12Ericsson divert function 95ERROR 11final 341format 12

from AT commands 10from call connections 12get phones 245intermediate 341music mute 195NO CARRIER 12NO DIALTONE 12OK 10

play phonebook entry 243play prompt 243play training recording 244recognise 243register phone 246RING 12save recording 245start synchronise 246train name 244unsolicited 345verbose/numeric 12

Result codes 10RING 51RING result code 12RLP 343